215
BSC6900 GSM V900R011C00 Hardware Description Issue 03 Date 2009-12-05 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 1/214

BSC6900 GSM

V900R011C00

Hardware Description

Issue 03

Date 2009-12-05

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Page 2: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 2/214

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any

assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

 

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang

Shenzhen 518129

People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

 

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written

consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

 

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

 

Notice

The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the

customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the

purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,

and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations

of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the

preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Page 3: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 3/214

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Changes in BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description..............................................................1-1

2 Physical Structure.......................................................................................................................2-1

3 Cabinet.........................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet..............................................................................................................................3-2

3.2 Classification of Cabinets................................................................................................................................3-3

3.3 Components of the Cabinet.............................................................................................................................3-4

3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet..........................................................................................................3-5

3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet...................................................................................................................3-6

3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components.................................................................3-6

3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet..........................................................3-8

3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR.........................................................................................3-10

3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR...........................................................................................3-15

3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR .........................................................................................3-18

4 Components of the Cabinet.....................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Power Distribution Box...................................................................................................................................4-2

4.1.1 Front Panel of the Power Distribution Box............................................................................................4-2

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power Distribution Box.............................................................................................4-3

4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the Power Distribution Box.......................................................................4-4

4.1.4 Distr ibution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box...........................................................4-5

4.2 Air Defence Subrack.......................................................................................................................................4-6

4.3 Rear Cable Trough..........................................................................................................................................4-6

4.4 Independent Fan Subrack................................................................................................................................4-7

4.4.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack.........................................................................................4-7

4.4.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack....................................................................4-8

5 Subracks.......................................................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Classification of Subracks...............................................................................................................................5-2

5.2 Components of the Subrack............................................................................................................................5-2

5.3 Fan Box...........................................................................................................................................................5-4

5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board).........................................................................................5-4

5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board).........................................................................................5-7

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description Contents

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 4: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 4/214

5.4 Slots in the Subrack.........................................................................................................................................5-9

5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack...........................................................................................................................5-10

5.6 Configuration of the Subrack........................................................................................................................5-11

5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS....................................................................................................................5-12

5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS.....................................................................................................................5-13

5.6.3 Configuration of the TCS.....................................................................................................................5-15

5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack.......................................................................................................5-16

6 Boards...........................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1 DPUc Board....................................................................................................................................................6-6

6.1.1 Functions of the DPUc Board................................................................................................................6-6

6.1.2 Panel of the DPUc Board.......................................................................................................................6-6

6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board......................................................................................................................6-7

6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board.........................................................................................6-8

6.2 DPUd Board....................................................................................................................................................6-8

6.2.1 Functions of the DPUd Board................................................................................................................6-9

6.2.2 Panel of the DPUd Board.......................................................................................................................6-9

6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board....................................................................................................................6-10

6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board.......................................................................................6-11

6.3 EIUa Board....................................................................................................................................................6-11

6.3.1 Functions of the EIUa Board................................................................................................................6-12

6.3.2 Panel of the EIUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-12

6.3.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-13

6.3.4 Ports on the EIUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-14

6.3.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board.........................................................................................................6-14

6.3.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board........................................................................................6-17

6.4 FG2a Board...................................................................................................................................................6-18

6.4.1 Functions of the FG2a Board...............................................................................................................6-18

6.4.2 Panel of the FG2a Board......................................................................................................................6-18

6.4.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board.....................................................................................................................6-19

6.4.4 Ports on the FG2a Board......................................................................................................................6-20

6.4.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board........................................................................................6-21

6.5 FG2c Board...................................................................................................................................................6-216.5.1 Functions of the FG2c Board...............................................................................................................6-22

6.5.2 Panel of the FG2c Board......................................................................................................................6-22

6.5.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board.....................................................................................................................6-23

6.5.4 Ports on the FG2c Board......................................................................................................................6-24

6.5.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board........................................................................................6-24

6.6 GCUa Board..................................................................................................................................................6-25

6.6.1 Functions of the GCUa Board..............................................................................................................6-26

6.6.2 Panel of the GCUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-26

6.6.3 LEDs on the GCUa Board....................................................................................................................6-27

6.6.4 Ports on the GCUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-28

Contents

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 5: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 5/214

6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa Board......................................................................................6-28

6.7 GOUa Board..................................................................................................................................................6-29

6.7.1 Functions of the GOUa Board..............................................................................................................6-29

6.7.2 Panel of the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-30

6.7.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board...................................................................................................................6-30

6.7.4 Ports on the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-31

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board......................................................................................6-31

6.8 GOUc Board..................................................................................................................................................6-33

6.8.1 Functions of the GOUc Board..............................................................................................................6-33

6.8.2 Panel of the GOUc Board.....................................................................................................................6-34

6.8.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board...................................................................................................................6-35

6.8.4 Ports on the GOUc Board.....................................................................................................................6-35

6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board......................................................................................6-36

6.9 OIUa Board...................................................................................................................................................6-37

6.9.1 Functions of the OIUa Board...............................................................................................................6-38

6.9.2 Panel of the OIUa Board......................................................................................................................6-38

6.9.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-39

6.9.4 Ports on the OIUa Board......................................................................................................................6-40

6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board........................................................................................6-40

6.10 OMUa Boar d...............................................................................................................................................6-42

6.10.1 Functions of the OMUa Board...........................................................................................................6-42

6.10.2 Panel of the OMUa Board..................................................................................................................6-43

6.10.3 LEDs on the OMUa Board.................................................................................................................6-446.10.4 Ports on the OMUa Board..................................................................................................................6-45

6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board...................................................................................6-45

6.11 PAMU Boar d...............................................................................................................................................6-46

6.11.1 Functions of the PAMU Board...........................................................................................................6-47

6.11.2 Panel of the PAMU Board.................................................................................................................6-47

6.11.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board................................................................................................................6-48

6.11.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board.......................................................................................................6-49

6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board...................................................................................6-50

6.12 PEUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-50

6.12.1 Functions of the PEUa Board.............................................................................................................6-50

6.12.2 Panel of the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................6-51

6.12.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board...................................................................................................................6-51

6.12.4 Ports on the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................6-52

6.12.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board......................................................................................................6-53

6.12.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board.....................................................................................6-55

6.13 PFCU Board................................................................................................................................................6-56

6.13.1 Functions of the PFCU Board............................................................................................................6-56

6.13.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board.........................................................................................................6-57

6.13.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board....................................................................................6-58

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description Contents

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 6: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 6/214

6.14 PFCB Board................................................................................................................................................6-59

6.14.1 Functions of the PFCB Board............................................................................................................6-59

6.14.2 Pins on the PFCB Board.....................................................................................................................6-59

6.14.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board....................................................................................6-61

6.15 POUc Board................................................................................................................................................6-61

6.15.1 Functions of the POUc Board............................................................................................................6-62

6.15.2 Panel of the POUc Board...................................................................................................................6-62

6.15.3 LEDs on the POUc Board..................................................................................................................6-63

6.15.4 Por ts on the POUc Board...................................................................................................................6-64

6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board.....................................................................................6-64

6.16 SCUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-66

6.16.1 Functions of the SCUa Board.............................................................................................................6-67

6.16.2 Panel of the SCUa Board...................................................................................................................6-67

6.16.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board..................................................................................................................6-68

6.16.4 Ports on the SCUa Board...................................................................................................................6-69

6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board.....................................................................................6-70

6.17 TNUa Board................................................................................................................................................6-70

6.17.1 Functions of the TNUa Board............................................................................................................6-71

6.17.2 Panel of the TNUa Board...................................................................................................................6-71

6.17.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board..................................................................................................................6-72

6.17.4 Ports on the TNUa Board...................................................................................................................6-72

6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board.....................................................................................6-73

6.18 XPUa Board................................................................................................................................................6-736.18.1 Functions of the XPUa Board............................................................................................................6-74

6.18.2 Panel of the XPUa Board...................................................................................................................6-74

6.18.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board..................................................................................................................6-75

6.18.4 Ports on the XPUa Board...................................................................................................................6-76

6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board.....................................................................................6-76

6.19 XPUb Board................................................................................................................................................6-77

6.19.1 Functions of the XPUb Board............................................................................................................6-78

6.19.2 Panel of the XPUb Board...................................................................................................................6-78

6.19.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board..................................................................................................................6-79

6.19.4 Ports on the XPUb Board...................................................................................................................6-80

6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board.....................................................................................6-80

7 Cables...........................................................................................................................................7-1

7.1 Power Cables...................................................................................................................................................7-3

7.2 PGND Ca bles..................................................................................................................................................7-4

7.3 Optical Cable...................................................................................................................................................7-6

7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable.....................................................................................................................................7-8

7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable.........................................................................................................7-10

7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable.........................................................................................................................7-14

7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable...............................................................................................7-16

Contents

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 7: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 7/214

7.8 Inter-TNUa Cable..........................................................................................................................................7-19

7.9 BITS Clock Cable.........................................................................................................................................7-20

7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable................................................................................................................................7-22

7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-24

7.12 Straight-Through Cable...............................................................................................................................7-24

7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack........................................................................7-27

7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-28

7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box..........................................................................7-29

7.16 EMU RS485 Communication Cable...........................................................................................................7-31

8 LEDs on the Boards....................................................................................................................8-1

8.1 LEDs on the DPUc Board...............................................................................................................................8-3

8.2 LEDs on the DPUd Board...............................................................................................................................8-3

8.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board................................................................................................................................8-4

8.4 LEDs on the FG2a Board................................................................................................................................8-4

8.5 LEDs on the FG2c Board................................................................................................................................8-5

8.6 LEDs on the GCUa Board......................................................................................... ......................................8-6

8.7 LEDs on the GOUa Board..............................................................................................................................8-7

8.8 LEDs on the GOUc Board..............................................................................................................................8-7

8.9 LEDs on the OIUa Board................................................................................................................................8-8

8.10 LEDs on the OMUa Board............................................................................................................................8-9

8.11 LEDs on the PAMU Board...........................................................................................................................8-9

8.12 LEDs on the PEUa Board............................................................................................................................8-10

8.13 LEDs on the POUc Board...........................................................................................................................8-11

8.14 LEDs on the SCUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-11

8.15 LEDs on the TNUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-12

8.16 LEDs on the XPUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-13

8.17 LEDs on the XPUb Board...........................................................................................................................8-14

9 DIP Switches on Components.................................................................................................9-1

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.............................................................................................................................9-2

9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board....................................................................................................................9-3

9.3 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board....................................................................................................................9-6

9.4 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board...................................................................................................................9-7

9.5 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board......................................................................................................................9-9

9.6 Pins on the PFCB Board................................................................................................................................9-11

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description Contents

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 8: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 8/214

Page 9: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 9/214

Figures

Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure...............................................................................................................2-1

Figure 3-1 Single-door cabinet.............................................................................................................................3-2

Figure 3-2 Double-door cabinet...........................................................................................................................3-3

Figure 3-3 Components of the BSC6900 cabinet.................................................................................................3-4

Figure 3-4 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR........................................................3-7

Figure 3-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.........................................3-9

Figure 3-6 Connections of signal cables for an MPR that is configured with one MPS and two EPSs............3-11

Figure 3-7 Connections of signal cables for an EPR that is configured with three EPSs..................................3-16

Figure 3-8 Connections of signal cables for the TCR........................................................................................3-19

Figure 4-1 Fr ont panel of the power distribution box(WP1E01DPD).................................................................4-2

Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the power distribution box(WP1E01DPD)..................................................................4-4

Figure 4-3 Distribution of the power switches in the MPR.................................................................................4-5

Figure 4-4 Air defence subrack............................................................................................................................4-6

Figure 4-5 Rear cable trough................................................................................................................................4-7Figure 4-6 Fr ont view of the independent fan subrack.........................................................................................4-7

Figure 4-7 Rear view of the independent fan subrack..........................................................................................4-8

Figure 5-1 Structure of the subrack......................................................................................................................5-3

Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board).......................................................................................5-5

Figure 5-3 Fan box (configured with the PFCB board).......................................................................................5-7

Figure 5-4 Structure of the subrack......................................................................................................................5-9

Figure 5-5 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.................................................................................5-10

Figure 5-6 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode...............................................5-12

Figure 5-7 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode..............................................5-13

Figure 5-8 MPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode............................................................5-13

Figure 5-9 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode................................................5-14

Figure 5-10 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode.............................................5-14

Figure 5-11 EPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode...........................................................5-15

Figure 5-12 TCS in full configuration (1)..........................................................................................................5-15

Figure 5-13 TCS in full configuration (2)..........................................................................................................5-16

Figure 6-1 Panel of the DPUc board....................................................................................................................6-7

Figure 6-2 Panel of the DPUd board..................................................................................................................6-10

Figure 6-3 Panel of the EIUa board....................................................................................................................6-13

Figure 6-4 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board................................................................................6-15

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description Figures

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 10: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 10/214

Figure 6-5 Panel of the FG2a board...................................................................................................................6-19

Figure 6-6 Panel of the FG2c board...................................................................................................................6-23

Figure 6-7 Panel of the GCUa board..................................................................................................................6-27

Figure 6-8 Panel of the GOUa board..................................................................................................................6-30

Figure 6-9 Panel of the GOUc board..................................................................................................................6-34

Figure 6-10 Panel of the OIUa board.................................................................................................................6-39

Figure 6-11 Panel of the OMUa board...............................................................................................................6-43

Figure 6-12 Panel of the PAMU board..............................................................................................................6-48

Figure 6-13 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board..............................................................................6-49

Figure 6-14 Panel of the PEUa board.................................................................................................................6-51

Figure 6-15 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.............................................................................6-53

Figure 6-16 DIP switch on the PFCU board......................................................................................................6-57

Figure 6-17 DIP switch on the PFCU board......................................................................................................6-58

Figure 6-18 Pins on the PFCB board..................................................................................................................6-60Figure 6-19 Pins on the PFCB board..................................................................................................................6-60

Figure 6-20 Panel of the POUc board................................................................................................................6-63

Figure 6-21 Panel of the SCUa board................................................................................................................6-68

Figure 6-22 Panel of the TNUa board................................................................................................................6-71

Figure 6-23 Panel of the XPUa board................................................................................................................6-75

Figure 6-24 Panel of the XPUb board................................................................................................................6-79

Figure 7-1 Internal power cable for subracks/External power cable....................................................................7-4

Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack........................................................................7-4

Figure 7-3 PG ND cable for the independent fan subrack....................................................................................7-6

Figure 7-4 Other PGND cables............................................................................................................................7-6

Figure 7-5 Installation positions of the optical cable...........................................................................................7-8

Figure 7-6 75-ohm coaxial cable..........................................................................................................................7-9

Figure 7-7 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable..............................................................................................7-11

Figure 7-8 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables .................................................7-13

Figure 7-9 120-ohm twisted pair cable...............................................................................................................7-14

Figure 7-10 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable...................................................................................7-16

Figure 7-11 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables......................................7-19

Figure 7-12 Inter-TNUa cable............................................................................................................................7-19

Figure 7-13 Installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables..............................................................................7-20

Figure 7-14 75-ohm coaxial clock cable............................................................................................................7-21

Figure 7-15 120-ohm clock conversion cable....................................................................................................7-21

Figure 7-16 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables....................................................................7-22

Figure 7-17 Y-shaped clock cable......................................................................................................................7-23

Figure 7-18 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables........................................................................7-23

Figure 7-19 Line clock signal cable...................................................................................................................7-24

Figure 7-20 Shielded straight-through cable......................................................................................................7-25

Figure 7-21 Unshielded straight-through cable..................................................................................................7-25

Figure 7-22 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the SCUa boards in differentsubracks...............................................................................................................................................................7-26

Figures

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 11: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 11/214

Figure 7-23 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack..............................................................7-27

Figure 7-24 Alarm box signal cable...................................................................................................................7-28

Figure 7-25 Connection of the alarm box signal cable.......................................................................................7-29

Figure 7-26 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.................................................................7-30

Figure 7-27 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box......................7-31

Figure 7-28 RS485 communication cable..........................................................................................................7-31

Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack...................................................................................9-2

Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board..................................................................................9-4

Figure 9-3 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board..................................................................................9-6

Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.................................................................................9-7

Figure 9-5 DIP switch on the PFCU board........................................................................................................9-10

Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board........................................................................................................9-10

Figure 9-7 Pins on the PFCB board....................................................................................................................9-11

Figure 9-8 Pins on the PFCB board....................................................................................................................9-12

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description Figures

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

Page 12: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 12/214

Page 13: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 13/214

Tables

Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900...............................................................................................................2-1

Table 3-1 Components of the cabinet and their configurations............................................................................3-5

Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22)............................................................. 3-5

Table 3-3 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR.........................................................3-7

Table 3-4 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.........................................3-10

Table 3-5 Connections of signal cables for the MPR.........................................................................................3-12

Table 3-6 Connections of signal cables for the EPR..........................................................................................3-17

Table 3-7 Connections of signal cables for the TCR..........................................................................................3-20

Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the power distribution box....................................................................... 4-3

Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)............................................. 4-4

Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR....................................................4-6

Table 4-4 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.....................................................................4-8

Table 5-1 Components of the subrack..................................................................................................................5-4

Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)......................................................................5-5Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)........................................5-6

Table 5-4 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)......................................................................5-8

Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)........................................5-9

Table 5-6 Description about the bits...................................................................................................................5-11

Table 5-7 Setting of the DIP switch...................................................................................................................5-11

Table 5-8 Technical specifications of the subrack.............................................................................................5-16

Table 6-1 Classification of the BSC6900 boards................................................................................................. 6-1

Table 6-2 LEDs on the DPUc board.....................................................................................................................6-7

Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the DPUc board........................................................................................6-8

Table 6-4 LEDs on the DPUd board..................................................................................................................6-10

Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the DPUd board......................................................................................6-11

Table 6-6 LEDs on the EIUa board....................................................................................................................6-13

Table 6-7 Por ts on the EIUa board.....................................................................................................................6-14

Table 6-8 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board..........................................................................6-15

Table 6-9 Description of the different DIP switches..........................................................................................6-16

Table 6-10 Hardware specifications of the EIUa board.....................................................................................6-17

Table 6-11 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-17

Table 6-12 LEDs on the FG2a board..................................................................................................................6-19

Table 6-13 Ports on the FG2a board...................................................................................................................6-20

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description Tables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

Page 14: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 14/214

Table 6-14 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board.....................................................................................6-21

Table 6-15 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-21

Table 6-16 LEDs on the FG2c board..................................................................................................................6-23

Table 6-17 Ports on the FG2c board...................................................................................................................6-24

Table 6-18 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board.....................................................................................6-25

Table 6-19 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-25

Table 6-20 LEDs on the GCUa board................................................................................................................6-27

Table 6-21 Ports on the GCUa board.................................................................................................................6-28

Table 6-22 Technical specifications of the GCUa board....................................................................................6-29

Table 6-23 LEDs on the GOUa board................................................................................................................6-31

Table 6-24 Ports on the GOUa board.................................................................................................................6-31

Table 6-25 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board...................................................................................6-32

Table 6-26 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-32

Table 6-27 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board....................................................................6-32

Table 6-28 LEDs on the GOUc board................................................................................................................6-35

Table 6-29 Ports on the GOUc board.................................................................................................................6-36

Table 6-30 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board...................................................................................6-36

Table 6-31 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-36

Table 6-32 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board....................................................................6-37

Table 6-33 LEDs on the OIUa board..................................................................................................................6-39

Table 6-34 Ports on the OIUa board...................................................................................................................6-40

Table 6-35 Hardware specifications of the OIUa board.....................................................................................6-40

Table 6-36 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-41Table 6-37 Specifications of the optical ports on the OIUa board.....................................................................6-41

Table 6-38 LEDs on the OMUa board...............................................................................................................6-44

Table 6-39 Ports on the OMUa board................................................................................................................6-45

Table 6-40 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa board......................................................................6-45

Table 6-41 Performance counters of the OMUa board......................................................................................6-46

Table 6-42 LEDs on the PAMU board...............................................................................................................6-48

Table 6-43 DIP switch on the PAMU board......................................................................................................6-49

Table 6-44 Technical specifications of the PAMU board..................................................................................6-50

Table 6-45 LEDs on the PEUa board.................................................................................................................6-52

Table 6-46 Ports on the PEUa board..................................................................................................................6-52

Table 6-47 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board........................................................................6-54

Table 6-48 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board....................................................................................6-55

Table 6-49 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-56

Table 6-50 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack).............................................6-57

Table 6-51 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)...................................................6-58

Table 6-52 Technical specifications of the PFCU board....................................................................................6-58

Table 6-53 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)........................................................6-60

Table 6-54 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack)..............................................................6-60

Table 6-55 Technical specifications of the PFCB board....................................................................................6-61

Tables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 15: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 15/214

Table 6-56 LEDs on the POUc board.................................................................................................................6-63

Table 6-57 Ports on the POUc board..................................................................................................................6-64

Table 6-58 Hardware specifications of the POUc board....................................................................................6-64

Table 6-59 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM transmission mode..........6-65

Table 6-60 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP transmission mode...............6-65

Table 6-61 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in HDLC transmission mode........6-66

Table 6-62 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board....................................................................6-66

Table 6-63 LEDs on the SCUa board.................................................................................................................6-68

Table 6-64 Ports on the SCUa board..................................................................................................................6-69

Table 6-65 Technical specifications of the SCUa board....................................................................................6-70

Table 6-66 LEDs on the TNUa board................................................................................................................6-72

Table 6-67 Ports on the TNUa board..................................................................................................................6-72

Table 6-68 Technical specifications of the TNUa board....................................................................................6-73

Table 6-69 LEDs on the XPUa board.................................................................................................................6-75

Table 6-70 Ports on the XPUa board..................................................................................................................6-76

Table 6-71 Technical specifications of the XPUa board....................................................................................6-76

Table 6-72 LEDs on the XPUb board................................................................................................................6-79

Table 6-73 Ports on the XPUb board..................................................................................................................6-80

Table 6-74 Technical specifications of the XPUb board....................................................................................6-80

Table 7-1 External power cables..........................................................................................................................7-3

Table 7-2 Internal power cables for subracks.......................................................................................................7-3

Table 7-3 Internal power cables for the independent fan subrack........................................................................7-4

Table 7-4 PG ND cables........................................................................................................................................7-5Table 7-5 BSC6900 optical cables.......................................................................................................................7-7

Table 7-6 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables.................................................7-9

Table 7-7 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable...........................................................................7-10

Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4..................................................................7-11

Table 7-9 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable...........................................................................7-12

Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2...........................................................................7-12

Table 7-11 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable....................................7-15

Table 7-12 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable............................................................................7-15

Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4................................................................7-17

Table 7-14 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable............................................................................7-17

Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2...........................................................................7-18

Table 7-16 Pins of the straight-through cable....................................................................................................7-26

Table 7-17 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack..............................................7-27

Table 7-18 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-28

Table 7-19 Pins of the alarm box signal cable....................................................................................................7-29

Table 7-20 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.................................................7-30

Table 7-21 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-30

Table 7-22 Pins of the RS485 communication cable.........................................................................................7-32

Table 8-1 LEDs on the DPUc board.....................................................................................................................8-3

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description Tables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

Page 16: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 16/214

Table 8-2 LEDs on the DPUd board....................................................................................................................8-3

Table 8-3 LEDs on the EIUa board......................................................................................................................8-4

Table 8-4 LEDs on the FG2a board......................................................................................................................8-4

Table 8-5 LEDs on the FG2c board......................................................................................................................8-5

Table 8-6 LEDs on the GCUa board....................................................................................................................8-6

Table 8-7 LEDs on the GOUa board....................................................................................................................8-7

Table 8-8 LEDs on the GOUc board....................................................................................................................8-7

Table 8-9 LEDs on the OIUa board......................................................................................................................8-8

Table 8-10 LEDs on the OMUa board.................................................................................................................8-9

Table 8-11 LEDs on the PAMU board...............................................................................................................8-10

Table 8-12 LEDs on the PEUa board.................................................................................................................8-10

Table 8-13 LEDs on the POUc board.................................................................................................................8-11

Table 8-14 LEDs on the SCUa board.................................................................................................................8-11

Table 8-15 LEDs on the TNUa board................................................................................................................ 8-12

Table 8-16 LEDs on the XPUa board.................................................................................................................8-13

Table 8-17 LEDs on the XPUb board................................................................................................................ 8-14

Table 9-1 Description about the bits.....................................................................................................................9-3

Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch.....................................................................................................................9-3

Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board............................................................................9-5

Table 9-4 Description of the different DIP switches............................................................................................9-5

Table 9-5 DIP switch on the PAMU board..........................................................................................................9-6

Table 9-6 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board............................................................................9-8

Table 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)............................................... 9-10Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack).....................................................9-11

Table 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack).......................................................... 9-11

Table 9-10 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack).............................................................. 9-12

Tables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 17: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 17/214

About This Document

Overview

This document describes the hardware components of the BSC6900. It provides the users witha detailed and comprehensive reference to the BSC6900.

Product Version

The following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BSC6900 V900R011C00

 

Intended Audience

This document is intended for:

l Installers

l Site operators

Organization

1 Changes in BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.

2 Physical Structure

The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.

3 Cabinet

The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1

Page 18: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 18/214

4 Components of the Cabinet

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box, air defense frame, rear cable

trough, subrack, independent fan subrack, and rack.

5 Subracks

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an

independent unit.

6 Boards

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.

7 Cables

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

8 LEDs on the Boards

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

9 DIP Switches on Components

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

Conventions

Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided,will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

avoided,could result in equipment damage, data loss,

 performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save

time.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.

 

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Organization

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 19: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 19/214

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface  Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.

 Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.

 

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

 Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all

items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

 

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK .

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

 

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description Organization

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3

Page 20: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 20/214

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

the two keys should be pressed in turn.

 

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the

 pointer to a certain position.

Organization

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 21: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 21/214

1 Changes in BSC6900 GSM Hardware

Description

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.

03 (2009-12-05)

This is the thir d commercial release.

Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new

topics:

l 3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components

Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue excludes no topics.

Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following

changes:

Topic Change Description

6.5.2 Panel of the FG2c Board,6.8.2 Panel

of the GOUc Board,6.15.2 Panel of the

POUc Board

Figures of the panel of FG2c board, GOUc

 board, and POUc board are modified.

6.5.4 Ports on the FG2c Board,6.8.4 Ports

on the GOUc Board,6.15.4 Ports on the

POUc Board

The description about the 2M0 and 2M1 ports

of FG2c board, GOUc board, and POUc

 board is deleted.

DIP Switch on the Subrack The description about bit 8 of the DIP switch

on the subrack is modified.

DIP Switches on the PEUa Board The description about DIP Switches on PEUa

 board is optimized.

6.4.2 Panel of the FG2a Board,6.6.2 Panel

of the GCUa Board,6.7.2 Panel of the

GOUa Board,6.10.2 Panel of the OMUa

Board,6.16.2 Panel of the SCUa Board

Figures of the panel of FG2a board, GCUa

 board, GOUa board, OMUa board, and SCUa

 board are optimized.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 1 Changes in BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

Page 22: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 22/214

Topic Change Description

DIP Switch on the Subrack Figure of the cover plate for the DIP switch

on the subrack is optimized.

 

02 (2009-10-30)

This is the second commercial release.

Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new

topics:

l 2 Physical Structure

l 6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board

l 6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board

l 6.3.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board

l 6.4.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board

l 6.5.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board

l 6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa Board

l 6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board

l 6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board

l 6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board

l 6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board

l 6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board

l 6.12.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board

l 6.13.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board

l 6.14.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board

l 6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board

l 6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board

l 6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board

l 6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board

l 6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board

Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue excludes no topics.

Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following

changes:

Topic Change Description

6.8.1 Functions of the GOUc Board The description about the Automatic

Protection Switching (APS) function is

added.

1 Changes in BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 23: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 23/214

Topic Change Description

6.7.1 Functions of the GOUa Board The description about the routing-based

 backup and load sharing functions is added.

6.4.1 Functions of the FG2a Board The description about the link aggregationfunction at the MAC layer is added.

6.18.1 Functions of the XPUa Board The description about the functions of the

MPU and CPUS subsystems is optimized.

6.19.1 Functions of the XPUb Board The description about the functions of the

MPU and CPUS subsystems is optimized.

 

01 (2009-07-30)

This is the first commercial release.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 1 Changes in BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

Page 24: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 24/214

Page 25: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 25/214

2 Physical Structure

The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.

Figure 2-1 shows the BSC6900 physical structure.

Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure

(1) LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal (2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame (DC)

 

Table 2-1 describes the components of the BSC6900.

Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900

Component Description

Cabinet For details, see 3 Cabinet.

Cables For details, see 7 Cables.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 2 Physical Structure

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

Page 26: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 26/214

Component Description

LMT The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM) terminal

that is installed with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal

software and is connected to the OM network of the BSC6900. The

LMT is used to operate and maintain the BSC6900.

For details, see the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.

 

2 Physical Structure

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 27: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 27/214

3 Cabinet

About This Chapter

The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei

 N68E-22 cabinet.

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet

The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door 

cabinet.

3.2 Classification of Cabinets

Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extended

 processing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).

3.3 Components of the Cabinet

The components of the BSC6900 cabinet are the power distribution box, subrack, air defence

subrack, inde pendent fan subrack, cable rack, rack, and rear cable trough.

3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet

The technical specifications of the cabinet refer to cabinet dimensions, height of the available

space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, in put voltage range, and Electromagnetic

Compatibility (EMC).

3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet

This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in

the cabinet.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

Page 28: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 28/214

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet

The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door 

cabinet.

Figure 3-1 shows the single-door cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows the double-door cabinet.

Figure 3-1 Single-door cabinet

 

3 Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 29: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 29/214

Figure 3-2 Double-door cabinet

 

3.2 Classification of Cabinets

Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extended

 processing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).

MPR

Only one MPR is configured in the BSC6900.

EPR

The number of EPRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume, but only one EPR can be

configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to configure the EPR.

TCR

The number of TCRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume and the configuration modes

of subracks. Up to two TCRs can be configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not toconfigure a TCR.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

Page 30: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 30/214

For details on the components of the MPR, the EPR, or the TCR, see 3.3 Components of the

Cabinet.

3.3 Components of the CabinetThe components of the BSC6900 cabinet are the power distribution box, subrack, air defence

subrack, independent fan subrack, cable rack, rack, and rear cable trough.

Figure 3-3 shows the components of the BSC6900 cabinet.

Figure 3-3 Components of the BSC6900 cabinet

(1) Air inlet (2) Independent fan subrack (3) Subrack  

(4) Air defence subrack (5) Filler panel (6) Power distribution box

(7) Cable rack (8) Rear cable trough

 

3 Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 31: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 31/214

Table 3-1 lists the components of the cabinet and describes their configurations.

Table 3-1 Components of the cabinet and their configurations

Component Configuration

Power Distribution Box Only one power distribution box is configured.

Subrack  l The MPR is configured with one main processing

subrack (MPS). In addition, depending on the traffic

volume, it is configured with zero to two extended

 processing subracks (EPSs). The total number of EPSs

cannot exceed two.

l The EPR is configured with one to three EPSs, depending

on the traffic volume.

l The TCR is configured with one to three transcoder 

subracks (TCSs), depending on the traffic volume.

Air Defence Subrack  Two air defence subracks are configured.

Independent Fan Subrack  Only one independent fan subrack is configured.

Rear Cable Trough Three rear cable troughs are configured.

 

NOTE

The subracks are numbered from bottom to top, and the MPS is numbered 0.

3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet

The technical specifications of the cabinet refer to cabinet dimensions, height of the available

space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, and Electromagnetic

Compatibility (EMC).

Table 3-2 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).

Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22)

Item Specification

Dimensions 2,200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)

Height of the available space 46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight l Empty cabinet≤ 100 kg

l Cabinet in full configuration≤ 320 kg

Rated input voltage -48 V

Input voltage range -40 V to -57 V

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

Page 32: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 32/214

Item Specification

EMC l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386

l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/

EEC

 

3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet

This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in

the cabinet.

3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components

This section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of power 

distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the componentsof the cabinet.

3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet

The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack 

and independent fan subrack, thus ensuring stable power supply to the subrack and independent

fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the grounding bar in the

equipment room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.

3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR 

The signal cables for the MPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-

ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, BITS clock 

cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR 

The signal cables for the EPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-

ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock 

cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR 

The signal cables for the TCR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-

ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock 

cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components

This section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of power 

distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the components

of the cabinet.

Figure 3-4 shows the working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR. Table

3-3 describes the working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR.

3 Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 33: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 33/214

Figure 3-4 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR 

 

Table 3-3 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR 

PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box

Outputof PowerDistribution Box

Subrack Input

63 A -48 V DC

output 1

A1(-) A7 NEG

(-)

-48 V DC input 1 on the

independent fan subrack 

A8 NEG(-)

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2

63 A -48 V DC

output 2

B1(-) B7 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 2 on the

independent fan subrack 

B8 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2

63 A RTN power 

output 1

A1(+) A7 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 1 on the

independent fan subrack 

A8 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack 

2

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

Page 34: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 34/214

PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box

Outputof PowerDistribution Box

Subrack Input

63 A RTN power 

output 2

B1(+) B7 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 2 on the

independent fan subrack 

B8 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack 

2

100 A -48 V DC

output 1

A3(-) A9 NEG

(-)

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1

A10 NEG

(-)

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0

100 A -48 V DC

output 2

B3(-) B9 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1

B10 NEG

(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0

100 A RTN power 

output 1

A3(+) A9 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack 

1

A10 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack 

0

100 A RTN power 

output 2

B3(+) B9 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack 

1

B10 RTN(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack 0

 

3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet

The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack 

and independent fan subrack, thus ensuring stable power supply to the subrack and independent

fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the grounding bar in the

equipment room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.

Figure 3-5 shows the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.

3 Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 35: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 35/214

Figure 3-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-9

Page 36: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 36/214

Table 3-4 describes the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900

cabinet.

Table 3-4 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet

SN Description

5, 6, 11, 12 Power cables for the bottom subrack  

3, 4, 9, 10 Power cables for the middle subrack  

1, 2, 7, 8 Power cables for the top subrack  

13 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and

the mounting bar 

14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mounting

 bar 

24, 25, 26 Inter-cabinet PGND cables

27, 28, 29, 30 Power cables for the independent fan subrack  

31 PGND cable connecting the independent fan subrack and

the mounting bar 

50-57 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

 

3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPRThe signal cables for the MPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-

ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, BITS clock 

cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-6 shows the connections of the signal cables

for an MPR that is configured with one MPS and two EPSs.

3 Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

3-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 37: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 37/214

Figure 3-6 Connections of signal cables for an MPR that is configured with one MPS and two

EPSs

 

NOTE

The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure 3-6

are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

Table 3-5 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-11

Page 38: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 38/214

Table 3-5 Connections of signal cables for the MPR 

SN Description ConnectorType1/ Connection

Position1

ConnectorType2/ Connection

Position2

Remarks

1, 2, 3, 4 75-ohm coaxial

cable or 120-ohm

twisted pair cable

connecting the

GCUa board to the

BITS clock 

SMB male

connector/CLKIN1

 port on the GCUa

 board in slot 13 of 

the MPS

Connector of the

BITS clock/BITS

clock port

Figure 3-6

shows the

clock cables

connected to

the CLKIN1

and CLKIN0

 ports. In

 practice, only

one port is

used to

connect to theBITS clock.

75-ohm coaxial

cable or 120-ohm

twisted pair cable

connecting theGCUa board to the

BITS clock 

SMB male

connector/CLKIN0

 port on the GCUa

 board in slot 13 of the MPS

Connector of the

BITS clock/BITS

clock port

75-ohm coaxial

cable or 120-ohm

twisted pair cable

connecting the

GCUa board to the

BITS clock 

SMB male

connector/CLKIN1

 port on the GCUa

 board in slot 12 of 

the MPS

Connector of the

BITS clock/BITS

clock port

75-ohm coaxial

cable or 120-ohm

twisted pair cable

connecting the

GCUa board to the

BITS clock 

SMB male

connector/CLKIN0

 port on the GCUa

 board in slot 12 of 

the MPS

Connector of the

BITS clock/BITS

clock port

5 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

connecting the

GCUa board to the

SCUa board

RJ45/CLKOUT0

 ports on the GCUa

 boards in slots 12

and 13 of the MPS

RJ45/CLKIN port

on the SCUa board

in slot 7 of the EPS

-

6 Y-shaped clock  

signal cableconnecting the

GCUa board to the

SCUa board

RJ45/CLKOUT0

 ports on the GCUa boards in slots 12

and 13 of the MPS

RJ45/CLKIN port

on the SCUa boardin slot 6 of the EPS

7 Cable connecting

TNUa boards of 

different subracks

DB14/TDM port on

the TNUa board in

slot 4 or 5 of the

MPS

DB14/TDM port

on the TNUa board

in slot 4 or 5 of the

EPS

-

3 Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

3-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 39: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 39/214

SN Description ConnectorType1/ ConnectionPosition1

ConnectorType2/ ConnectionPosition2

Remarks

8 Cable connecting

TNUa boards of 

different subracks

DB14/TDM port on

the TNUa board in

slot 4 or 5 of the

MPS

DB14/TDM port

on the TNUa board

in slot 4 or 5 of the

EPS

9, 10 E1/T1 cable for  

EIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port

on the EIUa board

in slot 14 or 15 of 

the MPS

DDF or other NEs -

11 E1/T1 cable for the

EIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port

on the EIUa board

in slot 14 or 15 of the EPS

DDF or other NEs -

12 Monitoring signal

cable for the power 

distribution box

DB15/Port

connecting the

 power distribution

 box to the

independent fan

subrack 

DB9/MONITOR 1

 port on the

independent fan

subrack 

-

13 Optical cable

 between the MPS

and the TCS

LC optical port/Slot

27 of the MPS

OIUa board in the

TCS, or ODF, or 

other NEs

-

14 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-

T port on the SCUa

 board in slot 7 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE

-T port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the EPS

-

15 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-

T port on the SCUa

 board in slot 7 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE

-T port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the EPS

16 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-

T port on the SCUa

 board in slot 6 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE

-T port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the EPS

17 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-

T port on the SCUa

 board in slot 6 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE

-T port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the EPS

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-13

Page 40: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 40/214

SN Description ConnectorType1/ ConnectionPosition1

ConnectorType2/ ConnectionPosition2

Remarks

18 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-

T port on the SCUa

 board in slot 7 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE

-T port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the EPS

-

19 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-

T port on the SCUa

 board in slot 6 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE

-T port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the EPS

20 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-

T port on the SCUa

 board in slot 7 of the

MPS

RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE

-T port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the EPS

-

21 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-

T port on the SCUa

 board in slot 6 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE

-T port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the EPS

-

22 Ethernet cable between the OMUa

 board and the

M2000 or LAN

RJ45/Ethernet porton the OMUa board RJ45/Ethernet porton the M2000 or of 

the LAN

ETH0 or ETH1 port on

the OMUa

 board,

connecting to

the M2000 or 

LAN

23 Monitoring signal

cable for the

independent fan

subrack 

DB15/MONITOR 

0 port on the

independent fan

subrack 

DB9/Monitor port

on the rear of the

 bottom subrack 

The cable is

mandatory

and is

installed

 beforedelivery.

Only one

monitoring

signal cable

for the

independent

fan subrack is

configured.

 

3 Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

3-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 41: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 41/214

3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR

The signal cables for the EPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-

ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock 

cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-7 shows the connections of the signal cables

for an EPR that is configured with three EPSs.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-15

Page 42: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 42/214

Figure 3-7 Connections of signal cables for an EPR that is configured with three EPSs

NOTE

The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure 3-7are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

3 Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

3-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 43: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 43/214

 

Table 3-6 describes the connections of signal cables for the EPR.

Table 3-6 Connections of signal cables for the EPR 

SN Description Connector Type1/  Connection Position1

Connector Type2/ Connection Position2

1 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the MPS

2 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the MPS

3 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the MPS

4 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the MPS

5 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6

of the MPS

6 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the MPS

7 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the MPS

8 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the MPS

9 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the MPS

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-17

Page 44: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 44/214

SN Description Connector Type1/  Connection Position1

Connector Type2/ Connection Position2

10 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the MPS

11 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the MPS

12 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the MPS

13, 14,

15

E1/T1 cable for the

EIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port on the

EIUa board in slot 14 or 15

of the EPS

DDF or other NEs

16, 17,

18

Cable connecting

TNUa boards of 

different subracks

DB14/TDM ports on the

TNUa boards in slots 4 and

5 of the EPS

DB14/TDM ports on the

TNUa boards in slots 4 and

5 of the EPS

19 Monitoring signal

cable for the power 

distribution box

DB15/Port connecting the

 power distribution box to

the independent fan subrack 

DB9/MONITOR 1 port on

the independent fan

subrack 

20 Monitoring signalcable for the

independent fan

subrack 

DB15/MONITOR 0 port onthe independent fan subrack 

DB9/Monitor port on therear of the bottom subrack 

 

3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR

The signal cables for the TCR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-

ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock 

cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-8 shows the connections of the signal cables

for the TCR.

3 Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

3-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 45: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 45/214

Figure 3-8 Connections of signal cables for the TCR 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-19

Page 46: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 46/214

NOTE

l The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure

3-8 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

l Among the multiple TCSs configured in the BSC6900 cabinet, one TCS is responsible for forwarding

the OM signals from other TCSs, and this TCS is referred to as the main TCS. In Figure 3-8, the lowestTCS serves as the main subrack. In practice, any TCS can serve as the main subrack, and the SCUa

 board in the main TCS is connected to the SCUa boards in other TCSs in star topology.

 

Table 3-7 describes the connections of signal cables for the TCR.

Table 3-7 Connections of signal cables for the TCR 

SN Description Connector Type1/  Connection Position1

Connector Type2/ Connection Position2

1 Monitoring signal

cable for the power 

distribution box

DB15/Port connecting the

 power distribution box to

the independent fan subrack 

DB9/MONITOR 1 port on

the independent fan

subrack 

2 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the main TCS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the TCS

3 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the main TCS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the TCS

4 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the main TCS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the TCS

5 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the main TCS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the TCS

6 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the main TCS

RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the TCS

7 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the main TCS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the TCS

8 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the main TCS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 6

of the TCS

3 Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

3-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 47: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 47/214

SN Description Connector Type1/  Connection Position1

Connector Type2/ Connection Position2

9 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the main TCS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BASE-T port

on the SCUa board in slot 7

of the TCS

10, 11,

12

Cable connecting

TNUa boards of 

different subracks

DB14/TDM ports on the

TNUa boards in slots 4 and

5 of the TCS

DB14/TDM ports on the

TNUa boards in slots 4 and

5 of the TCS

13, 14,

15

E1/T1 cable for the

EIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port on the

EIUa board in slot 14 or 15

of the TCS

DDF or other NEs

16 Optical cable

 between differentsubracks

LC optical port/The RX/TX

 port on the OIUa board inslot 27 of the TCS

OIUa board of the MPS/

EPS or ODF

17 Monitoring signal

cable for the

independent fan

subrack 

DB15/MONITOR 0 port on

the independent fan subrack 

DB9/Monitor port on the

rear of the bottom subrack 

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-21

Page 48: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 48/214

Page 49: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 49/214

4 Components of the Cabinet

About This Chapter

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box, air defense frame, rear cable

trough, subrack, independent fan subrack, and rack.

4.1 Power Distribution Box

Each cabinet must be configured with a power distribution box, which is installed at the top of 

the cabinet.

4.2 Air Defence Subrack 

The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through

air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.

4.3 Rear Cable Trough

The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable

trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.

4.4 Independent Fan Subrack 

Besides the f an boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan

subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

Page 50: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 50/214

4.1 Power Distribution Box

Each cabinet must be configured with a power distribution box, which is installed at the top of the cabinet.

The power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection for the four 

-48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the parts of the cabinet. Each group has four 

-48 V outputs and four RTN outputs. The power distribution box also detects the status of input

voltage and the output power, and generates audible and visual alarms when faults occur.

4.1.1 Front Panel of the Power Distribution Box

The components on the front panel of the power distribution box are the panel of the power 

allocation monitoring unit (PAMU) and the power distribution switches.

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power Distribution Box

The components on the rear panel of the power distribution box are the power input terminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack,

and a 2-hole grounding screw.

4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the Power Distribution Box

This section describes the technical specifications for the input and output power supply of the

 power distribution box.

4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box

The power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a fixed relation

 between the eight outputs of the power distribution box at the top of the cabinet and the intra-

cabinet components.

4.1.1 Front Panel of the Power Distribution Box

The components on the front panel of the power distribution box are the panel of the power 

allocation monitoring unit (PAMU) and the power distribution switches.

Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the power distribution box.

Figure 4-1 Front panel of the power distribution box(WP1E01DPD)

(1) PAMU (2) RUN LED (3) ALM LED

(4) Mute switch (5) Power distribution switches (6) Label for power distribution switches

4 Components of the Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 51: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 51/214

NOTE

l For details about the PAMU board, see 6.11 PAMU Board.

l When the power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,

indicating that the PAMU board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the

RUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the power distribution box.

 

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.

l If you set the mute switch to I, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when

it is faulty.

l If you set the mute switch to O, the power distribution box does not generate any audible

alarm when it is faulty.

The front panel of the power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.

Table 4-1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the power distribution box.

Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the power distribution box

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The PAMU board is functional and

communicates with the SCUa board

 properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s

The PAMU board is faulty or it does notcommunicate with the SCUa board

 properly.

OFF There is no power supply to the PAMU

 board or the power distribution box

does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm related to the power  

distribution box.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.

During the self-check of the PAMU

 board, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LED

is functional.

 

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power Distribution Box

The components on the rear panel of the power distribution box are the power input terminal

 block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack,

and a 2-hole grounding screw.

Figure 4-2 shows the rear panel of the power distribution box.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

Page 52: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 52/214

Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the power distribution box(WP1E01DPD)

(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal block  

(3) Port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack (4) 2-hole grounding screw

 

NOTE

l Figure 4-2 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.

l On the power input terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable

are labeled 3(-) and 1(-), and the wiring terminals for the RTN power cable are labeled 3(+) and 1(+).

l On the power output terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable

and RTN power cable are labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+), respectively.

4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the Power Distribution Box

This section describes the technical specifications for the input and output power supply of the

 power distribution box.

Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the power distribution box.

Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

Item Sub-item Specification

Input Rated input voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -72 V DC

Input mode Two groups of power inputs: A and B. Group A

consists of the power inputs A1+A2 and A3. Group

B consists of the power inputs B1+B2 and B3. Each

group has one or two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power 

inputs.

Max. input current The maximum rated input current of each route is

100 A.

Output Rated output voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

Output voltage

range

-40 V DC to -72 V DC

4 Components of the Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 53: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 53/214

Item Sub-item Specification

Output mode and

current

Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each group

has one to four -48 V DC or -60 V DC power 

outputs. The maximum rated output current of each

output is 50 A and that of each group is 100 A.

Each output is controlled by MCBs: A7-A10 and

B7-B10. These MCBs provide the power surge

 protection function.

Output protection

specifications

The power surge protection point is 70 A. You need

to manually switch on the corresponding MCB

after the power surge protection.

Rated output power 9,600 W (Two groups of power outputs: A and B.

Each group has two -48 V DC power outputs.)

NOTEFor group A, power inputs A1+A2 correspond to power outputs A1-A8, and power input A3 corresponds

to power outputs A9-A10. Similarly, for group B, power inputs B1+B2 correspond to power outputs B1-

B8, and power input B3 corresponds to power outputs B9-B10.

 

4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box

The power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a fixed relation

 between the eight outputs of the power distribution box at the top of the cabinet and the intra-

cabinet components.

Figure 4-3 shows the relation between the eight power control switches on the power distribution

 box and the components in the MPR. Table 4-3 describes the relation between the power control

switches and the components.

Figure 4-3 Distribution of the power switches in the MPR 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

Page 54: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 54/214

 

Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR 

Component Power Switch

Subrack 2 A8, B8

Subrack 1 A9, B9

Subrack 0 A10, B10

Independent fan subrack A7, B7

 

4.2 Air Defence SubrackThe air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through

air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.

Physical appearance

Figure 4-4 shows the air defence subrack.

Figure 4-4 Air defence subrack 

 

Dimensions

The dimensions of the air defence subrack are 44.45 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 476.1 mm

(depth).

4.3 Rear Cable Trough

The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable

trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.

Figure 4-5 shows the rear cable trough.

4 Components of the Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 55: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 55/214

Figure 4-5 Rear cable trough

 

4.4 Independent Fan SubrackBesides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan

subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

4.4.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack 

The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.

4.4.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack 

The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,

 power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility

(EMC).

4.4.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack

The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.

The fan box can be configured with either the PFCU or the PFCB board, which does not affect

the appearance of the independent fan subrack.

Front View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-6 Front view of the independent fan subrack 

(1) PFCB or PFCU board (2) Fans (3) Handle of the independent fan subrack  

(4) Screw (5) LED on the fan box

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

Page 56: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 56/214

NOTE

l The PFCU or the PFCB is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.13

PFCU Board. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.14 PFCB Board.

l When the PFCU board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on the

fan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. For details, see 5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board) .

l When the PFCB board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on the

fan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. For 

details, see 5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board) .

Rear View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-7 Rear view of the independent fan subrack 

(1) Monitor 1 Port, used to connect to the power 

distribution box

(2) Power input port (3) Monitor 2 Port (Reserved)

(4) Monitor 0 Port, used to connect to subracks (5) Monitor 3 Port (Reserved)

4.4.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack

The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,

 power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility

(EMC).

Table 4-4 describes the technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.

Table 4-4 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack 

Item Specification

Dimensions 86.1 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Weight Empty subrack:≤ 2.4 kg; subrack with fan boxes:≤ 6.9

kg

Power supply -48 V DC. The input voltage ranges from -40 V DC to -60

V DC.

Maximum power consumption ≤ 150 W

Fan speed < 5.0 m/s

4 Components of the Cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 57: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 57/214

Item Specification

EMC Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.2.1

(2000-03).

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

Page 58: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 58/214

Page 59: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 59/214

5 Subracks

About This Chapter

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an

independent unit.

5.1 Classification of Subracks

Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extended

 processing su brack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).

5.2 Components of the Subrack 

The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.

5.3 Fan Box

The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan

 box.

5.4 Slots in the Subrack 

The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front

and rear sides of the backplane.

5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack 

The DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

5.6 Configuration of the Subrack 

BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS, EPS, and TCS. This section describes the typicalconfigurations of these subracks in different configuration modes.

5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack 

The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space

height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

Page 60: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 60/214

5.1 Classification of Subracks

Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extended

 processing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).

MPS

As the main processing subrack, the MPS is configured in the MPR. Only one MPS is configured

in the BSC6900. The MPS processes the basic services of the BSC6900, performs operation and

maintenance, and provides clock signals for the system.

EPS

As the extended processing subrack, the EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. It processes the

 basic services of the BSC6900.

TCS

As the transcoder subrack, the TCS is configured in the MPR, EPR, or TCR in BM/TC separated

configuration mode. It performs transcoding, rate adaptation, and sub-multiplexing.

5.2 Components of the Subrack

The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.

Structure of the Subrack

In compliance with the IEC60297 standard, each subrack is 19 inches in width and 12 U in

height. Figure 5-1 shows the structure of the subrack.

5 Subracks

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 61: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 61/214

Figure 5-1 Structure of the subrack 

(1) Fan box (2) Mounting ear (3) Guide rail

(4) Front cable trough (5) Boards (6) Grounding screw

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

Page 62: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 62/214

(7) DC power input port (8) Port for the monitoring signal cable of the

 power distribution box

(9) Cover plate of the DIP switch

 

Components

Table 5-1 describes the components of the subrack.

Table 5-1 Components of the subrack 

Component Refer to...

Fan box 5.3 Fan Box

Slots in the subrack  5.4 Slots in the Subrack 

Front cable trough The front cable trough is used to lead the cablesfrom the front of the subrack to both sides of the

cabinet.

Backplane The backplane is used to connect the boards in

the same subrack.

 

5.3 Fan Box

The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan

 box.

5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)

This section describes the appearance of and LEDs on the fan box when the fan box is configured

with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications of the fan box.

5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)

This section describes the appearance of and LEDs on the fan box when the fan box is configured

with the PFCB board. This also describes the technical specifications of the fan box.

5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)

This section describes the appearance of and LEDs on the fan box when the fan box is configuredwith the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)

The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.

Figure 5-2 shows the fan box.

5 Subracks

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 63: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 63/214

Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

(1) Power unit of the fan box (2) Fans (3) PFCU board

(4) LED on the fan box (5) Screws (6) Handles of the fan box

 

NOTE

l The power unit is inserted into the rear part of the fan box. It provides power supply for nine fans and

keeps the voltage stable through a stabilizing tube, to ensure normal operations of the fans.

l The PFCU board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.13 PFCU

Board.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)

The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.

Table 5-2 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.

Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

Color Status Description

Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box works normally (the

fan box is registered).

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box works normally (thefan box is not registered).

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

Page 64: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 64/214

Color Status Description

Red ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box is registered and has

one of the following problems:

l One-way power supply to thesubrack 

l Communication failure

l Fans ceasing to run or 

running at a too low speed

l Fan box in an excessively

high temperature or 

temperature sensor failure

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box is not registered and

has one of the following

 problems:l One-way power supply to the

subrack 

l Fans ceasing to run or 

running at a too low speed

l Fan box in an excessively

high temperature or 

temperature sensor failure

 

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa board in the same

subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box and the

SCUa board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)

The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, voltage, maximum power,

detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.

Table 5-3 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.

Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)Item Specification

Space height 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Input voltage range -42 V DC to -60 V DC

Maximum power 150 W

Detectable temperature range -5℃ to 55℃

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from

55% to 100% of the full speed.

 

5 Subracks

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 65: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 65/214

NOTE

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans

in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)This section describes the appearance of and LEDs on the fan box when the fan box is configured

with the PFCB board. This also describes the technical specifications of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)

The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.

Figure 5-3 shows the fan box.

Figure 5-3 Fan box (configured with the PFCB board)

(1) PFCB Board (2) Fans (3) LED on the fan box

(4) Screw (5) Handles of the fan box

 

NOTE

l The PFCB board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.14 PFCB

Board.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)

The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.

Table 5-4 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

Page 66: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 66/214

Table 5-4 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)

Color Status Description

Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The fan box is supplied with power in

two ways without any fault (and isregistered).

ON for 0.25s and OFF

for 0.25s

The fan box is supplied with power in

two ways without any fault (not

registered).

Red ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The fan box is registered and has one of 

the following problems:

l One-way power supply to the

subrack 

l Communication failure

l Fans ceasing to run or running at a too

low speed

l Fan box in an excessively high

temperature or temperature sensor 

failure

l Speed adjustment function failure

ON for 0.25s and OFF

for 0.25s

The fan box is not registered and has one

of the following problems:

l One-way power supply to the

subrack l Fans ceasing to run or running at a too

low speed

l Fan box in an excessively high

temperature or temperature sensor 

failure

l Speed adjustment function failure

 

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa board in the same

subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box and the

SCUa board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)

The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, input voltage range,

maximum power, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.

Table 5-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.

5 Subracks

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 67: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 67/214

Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)

Item Specification

Space height 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Maximum power 150 W

Detectable temperature range -5℃ to +55℃

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from

55% to 100% of the full speed.

 

NOTE

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans

in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.4 Slots in the Subrack

The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front

and rear sides of the backplane.

Figure 5-4 shows the structure of the subrack.

Figure 5-4 Structure of the subrack 

(1) Front slot (2) Backplane (3) Rear slot

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-9

Page 68: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 68/214

NOTE

l Each subrack provides a total of 28 slots. The 14 slots on the front side of the backplane are numbered

from 00 to 13, and those on the rear side from 14 to 27.

l Two neighboring slots, such as slot 00 and slot 01 or slot 02 and slot 03, can be configured as a pair 

of active/standby slots. A pair of active and standby boards must be installed in a pair of active andstandby slots.

5.5 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch

The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the

DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack .

Appearance

Figure 5-5 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 5-5 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack 

 

Description about the DIP Switch

The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. Thehigher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 5-6 describes the bits.

5 Subracks

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

5-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 69: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 69/214

Table 5-6 Description about the bits

Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the

least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bitis set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significant

 bit)

Reserved

 

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting 

As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd

number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:

1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.

2. Set bit 7 to ON.

3. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. Note that the setting of bit 8

remains unchanged.

l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.

l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 2 and that bit 8 is set to OFF. Table 5-7describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 5-7 Setting of the DIP switch

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of the DIPSwitch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

 

5.6 Configuration of the Subrack

BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS, EPS, and TCS. This section describes the typicalconfigurations of these subracks in different configuration modes.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

Page 70: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 70/214

5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS

The configuration of the boards in the MPS varies with the configuration modes of the

BSC6900 subracks.

5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS

The configuration of the boards in the EPS varies with the configuration modes of theBSC6900 subracks.

5.6.3 Configuration of the TCS

In BM/TC separated configuration mode, the TCS can be configured in the TCR.

5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS

The configuration of the boards in the MPS varies with the configuration modes of the

BSC6900 subracks.

The boards that can be installed in the MPS are the OMUa board, SCUa board, GCUa board,

TNUa board, XPUa/XPUb board, DPUc board, DPUd board, EIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board,

GOUa/GOUc board, POUc board, OIUa board, and PEUa board. The following figures show

the MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated, BM/TC combined, and A over IP

configuration modes.

Figure 5-6 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode

 

5 Subracks

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

5-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 71: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 71/214

Figure 5-7 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode

 

Figure 5-8 MPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode

 

NOTE

The INT board (interface board) can be the PEUa board, EIUa board, OIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, POUc

 board, or GOUa/GOUc board.

5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS

The configuration of the boards in the EPS varies with the configuration modes of the

BSC6900 subracks.

The boards that can be installed in the EPS are the SCUa board, TNUa board, XPUa/XPUb

 board, DPUc board, DPUd board, EIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, GOUa/GOUc board, POUc

 board, OIUa board, and PEUa board. The following figures show the EPS in full configuration

in BM/TC separated, BM/TC combined, and A over IP configuration modes.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

Page 72: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 72/214

Figure 5-9 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode

 

Figure 5-10 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode

 

5 Subracks

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

5-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 73: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 73/214

Figure 5-11 EPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode

 

NOTE

The INT board (interface board) can be the PEUa board, EIUa board, OIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, POUc

 board, or GOUa/GOUc board.

5.6.3 Configuration of the TCS

In BM/TC separated configuration mode, the TCS can be configured in the TCR.

By default, the TCS must be configured with the SCUa board and TNUa board. The DPUc board

and EIUa/OIUa board are optional boards.

Figure 5-12 shows the TCS in full configuration when E1/T1 transmission is used on the A

interface.

Figure 5-12 TCS in full configuration (1)

 

Figure 5-13 shows the TCS in full configuration when STM-1 transmission is used on the Ainterface.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

Page 74: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 74/214

Figure 5-13 TCS in full configuration (2)

 

5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack

The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space

height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.

Table 5-8 describes the technical specifications of the subrack.

Table 5-8 Technical specifications of the subrack 

Item Specification

Dimensions 530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Available space height 12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards:

≤ 57 kg

Power consumption in full

configuration

l MPS:≤ 1,000 W

l EPS:≤ 1,000 W

l TCS:≤ 1,000 W

 

5 Subracks

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

5-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 75: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 75/214

6 Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.

The BSC6900 boards perform different functions through the loading of different software.

Table 6-1 describes the BSC6900 boards.

Table 6-1 Classification of the BSC6900 boards

Board Logical Function FunctionDescription

Board Name

DPUc GTC (GSM BSC TC) GSM speech service

 processing

Data Processing Unit

REV: c

DPUd GPCU (GSM BSC PCU) GSM packet service

 processing

Data Processing Unit

REV:d

EIUa Abis_TDM - 32-port E1/T1 circuit

Interface Unit REV:aAter_TDM -

Pb_TDM -

A_TDM -

FG2a GbIP (GSM BSC Gb IP

interface)

- 8-port FE or 2-port

electronic GE interface

unit REV:aIP -

FG2c IP - 12-port FE or 4-port

electronic GE interface

unit REV:c

GCUa Clock - General Clock Unit

REV:a

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

Page 76: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 76/214

Board Logical Function FunctionDescription

Board Name

GOUa IP - 2-port packet over GE

Optical interface Unit

REV:a

GOUc IP - 4-port packet over GE

Optical interface Unit

REV:c

OIUa Abis_TDM - 1-port channelized

Optical STM-1 Interface

Unit REV:aAter_TDM -

Pb_TDM -

A_TDM -

OMUa OAM (Operation,

Administration and

Maintenance)

OM management Operation and

Maintenance Unit REV:a

PEUa FR - 32-port Packet over E1/

T1/J1 interface Unit

REV:aHDLC -

IP -

POUc TDM - 4-port IP over  

channelized Optical

STM-1/OC-3 interfaceUnit REV:c

IP -

SCUa MAC Switching - GE Switching network  

and Control Unit REV:a

TNUa TDM Switching - TDM switching Network  

Unit REV:a

XPUa GCP (GSM BSC Control

 plane Process)

GSM BSC control

 plane processing

eXtensible Processing

Unit REV:a

RGCP (Resource

Management and GSMBSC Control plane Process)

Resource

management andGSM BSC control

 plane processing

MCP (Mathematics

Computing Process)

Mathematical

computing

XPUb GCP (GSM BSC Control

 plane Process)

GSM BSC control

 plane processing

eXtensible Processing

Unit REV:b

RGCP (Resource

Management and GSM

BSC Control plane Process)

Resource

management and

GSM BSC control

 plane processing

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 77: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 77/214

Board Logical Function FunctionDescription

Board Name

MCP (Mathematics

Computing Process)

Mathematical

computing

PAMU - - Power Allocation

Monitoring Unit

PFCU - - Fan Control Unit

PFCB - - Fan Control Board

 

6.1 DPUc Board

DPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c. For the MPS, the DPUc board can be installed in

slots 8 to 11. For the EPS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 13 and slots14 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3 and slots 8 to 13.

6.2 DPUd Board

DPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d. The DPUd board can be installed in slots 8 to 13

in the MPS/EPS.

6.3 EIUa Board

EIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a. The EIUa board is optional. It can

 be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of EIUa boards to be installed depends on site

requirements. For the MPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27.

For the EPS or TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.4 FG2a BoardFG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board is

optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be

installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots

14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.5 FG2c Board

FG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed

depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 19.

For the EPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.

6.6 GCUa Board

GCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. The GCUa board is mandatory. Two GCUa boardsmust be installed in slots 12 and 13 in the MPS.

6.7 GOUa Board

GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends

on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 or slots 24

to 27. For the EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.8 GOUc Board

GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be

installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots16 to 19. For the EPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-3

Page 78: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 78/214

6.9 OIUa Board

OIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a. The OIUa board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of OIUa boards to be installed

depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19

and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS/TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.10 OMUa Board

OMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. The OMUa board is mandatory. One

or two OMUa boards must be configured in the BSC6900. The width of the OMUa board is

twice the width of other boards. Therefore, one OMUa board occupies two slots. The OMUa

 board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23

are recommended.

6.11 PAMU Board

PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power 

distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU

 board.

6.12 PEUa Board

PEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.

It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed

depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19

and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.13 PFCU Board

PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each

fan box is configured with one PFCU board.

6.14 PFCB Board

PFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each

fan box is configured with one PFCB board.

6.15 POUc Board

POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The

POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of POUc

 boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can be

installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed in

slots 14 to 27.

6.16 SCUa Board

SCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.

Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.

6.17 TNUa BoardTNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. One or two

TNUa boards can be installed in slots 4 and 5 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.

6.18 XPUa Board

XPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to ten

XPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed

in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can

 be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 13, and slots 14 to 27.

6.19 XPUb Board

XPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to ten

XPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards can

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 79: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 79/214

 be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUb

 boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 13, and slots 14 to 27.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-5

Page 80: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 80/214

6.1 DPUc Board

DPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c. For the MPS, the DPUc board can be installed in

slots 8 to 11. For the EPS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 13 and slots

14 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3 and slots 8 to 13.

6.1.1 Functions of the DPUc Board

The DPUc board processes GSM voice services and data services.

6.1.2 Panel of the DPUc Board

There are only LEDs on the DPUc board.

6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board

There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUc board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

6.1.1 Functions of the DPUc Board

The DPUc board processes GSM voice services and data services.

The DPUc board performs the following functions:

l Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions

The DPUc board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding functions in any of the following

configuration modes: BM/TC combined, A over IP and Abis over IP, or A over IP and Abis

over HDLC.

l Encodes and decodes voice services

The DPUc board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding function in either of the following

configuration modes: BM/TC combined or A over IP and Abis over TDM. The DPUc board

in the TCS performs the preceding function in BM/TC separated configuration mode.

l Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function

When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals

are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.

This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of speech services.

l Provides the voice enhancement function

l Detects voice faults automatically

6.1.2 Panel of the DPUc Board

There are only LEDs on the DPUc board.

Figure 6-1 shows the panel of the DPUc board.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 81: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 81/214

Figure 6-1 Panel of the DPUc board

 

6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board

There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.

Table 6-2 LEDs on the DPUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-7

Page 82: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 82/214

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the

 board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board

The technical specifications of the DPUc board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-3 describes the technical specifications of the DPUc board.

Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the DPUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 49.40 W

Weight 1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability Supporting 960 TCH/Fs; supporting 3,740 IWF

flow numbers

 

6.2 DPUd Board

DPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d. The DPUd board can be installed in slots 8 to 13

in the MPS/EPS.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 83: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 83/214

6.2.1 Functions of the DPUd Board

The DPUd board processes GSM PS services.

6.2.2 Panel of the DPUd Board

There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUd board.

6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board

There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board

The technical specifications of the DPUd board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

6.2.1 Functions of the DPUd Board

The DPUd board processes GSM PS services.

The DPUd board performs the following functions:

l Processes the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are

coded in MCS9

l Processes packet links

l Detects packet faults automatically

6.2.2 Panel of the DPUd Board

There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUd board.

Figure 6-2 shows the panel of the DPUd board.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

Page 84: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 84/214

Figure 6-2 Panel of the DPUd board

 

6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board

There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.

Table 6-4 LEDs on the DPUd board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF

for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and

OFF for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 85: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 85/214

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the

 board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board

The technical specifications of the DPUd board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-5 describes the technical specifications of the DPUd board.

Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the DPUd board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/

standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is

responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 49.40 W

Weight 1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability Processing the PS services on up to 1,024

simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are

coded in MCS9

 

6.3 EIUa Board

EIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a. The EIUa board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of EIUa boards to be installed depends on site

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-11

Page 86: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 86/214

requirements. For the MPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27.

For the EPS or TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.3.1 Functions of the EIUa Board

The EIUa board provides E1/T1 transmission for the BSC6900.

6.3.2 Panel of the EIUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the EIUa board.

6.3.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board

There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

6.3.4 Ports on the EIUa Board

There are seven ports on the EIUa board.

6.3.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board

The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.

6.3.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa BoardThe technical specifications of the EIUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative

humidity.

6.3.1 Functions of the EIUa Board

The EIUa board provides E1/T1 transmission for the BSC6900.

The EIUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports for TDM transmission

l Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission rate is 2.048

Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s

l Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol

l Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol

l Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby EIUa

 boards

l Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC side

l Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces

6.3.2 Panel of the EIUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the EIUa board.

Figure 6-3 shows the panel of the EIUa board.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 87: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 87/214

Figure 6-3 Panel of the EIUa board

 

6.3.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board

There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-6 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.

Table 6-6 LEDs on the EIUa boardLED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board

is faulty.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-13

Page 88: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 88/214

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

6.3.4 Ports on the EIUa Board

There are seven ports on the EIUa board.

Table 6-7 describes the ports on the EIUa board.

Table 6-7 Ports on the EIUa board

Port Function Connector Type

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and

receive E1/T1 signals on

channels 0-7

DB44

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and

receive E1/T1 signals on

channels 8-15

DB44

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and

receive E1/T1 signals on

channels 16-23

DB44

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and

receive E1/T1 signals on

channels 24-31

DB44

2M0 and 2M1 Output ports for the 2.048 MHz

clock signals, used to transmit

the clock signals extracted from

the line clock for system

reference

SMB male connector 

TESTOUT Output port for clock signals.

The clock signals are used for 

testing.

SMB male connector 

 

6.3.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board

The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.

Figure 6-4 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 89: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 89/214

Figure 6-4 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In this

case, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.

l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.

In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.

l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced to

and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Table 6-8 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

Table 6-8 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

S1 8 Impedance

selection switch

of E1s/T1s 0-7

ON OFF

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-15

Page 90: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 90/214

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

7 Impedance

selection switch

of E1s/T1s 8-15

ON OFF

6 Impedance

selection switch

of E1s/T1s

16-23

ON OFF

5 Impedance

selection switch

of E1s/T1s

24-31

ON OFF

1-4 Reserved

S3 1-8 TX ground

switch of E1s/

T1s 0-7

ON OFF

S4 1-8 TX ground

switch of E1s/

T1s 8-15

ON OFF

S5 1-8 TX ground

switch of E1s/T1s 16-23

ON OFF

S6 1-8 TX ground

switch of E1s/

T1s 24-31

ON OFF

 

Table 6-9 describes the different DIP switches.

Table 6-9 Description of the different DIP switches

DIP Switch Description

E1/T1 impedance selection switch Used to select the logical transmission mode of the

 board and to notify the software of the current

transmission mode

E1/T1 TX ground switch Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end

of the E1/T1 signals

 

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 91: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 91/214

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switches

on the standby board.

l The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.

6.3.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board

The technical specifications of the EIUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative

humidity.

Table 6-10 describes the hardware specifications of the EIUa board.

Table 6-10 Hardware specifications of the EIUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/

standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is

responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 28.60 W

Weight 1.16 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

 

Table 6-11 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-11 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 384

A CIC(64K) 960

Ater CIC(16K) 3,840

Pb CIC(16K) 3,840

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-17

Page 92: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 92/214

6.4 FG2a Board

FG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board is

optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be

installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots

14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.4.1 Functions of the FG2a Board

As an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.

6.4.2 Panel of the FG2a Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.

6.4.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board

Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT.

6.4.4 Ports on the FG2a Board

There are ten ports on the FG2a board.

6.4.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board

The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative

humidity.

6.4.1 Functions of the FG2a BoardAs an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.

The FG2a board performs the following functions:

l Provides eight channels over FE ports or two channels over GE ports

l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer 

l Supports the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces

6.4.2 Panel of the FG2a BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.

Figure 6-5 shows the panel of the FG2a board.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 93: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 93/214

Figure 6-5 Panel of the FG2a board

 

6.4.3 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-12 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 6-12 LEDs on the FG2a board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-19

Page 94: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 94/214

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

6.4.4 Ports on the FG2a Board

There are ten ports on the FG2a board.

Table 6-13 describes the ports on the FG2a board.

Table 6-13 Ports on the FG2a board

Port Function Connector

Type

FE(1)~ FE(3) 10M/100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit

10/100M signals

RJ45

FE/GE(0) 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to

transmit 10/100/1000M signals

RJ45

2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male

connector 

 

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 95: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 95/214

6.4.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board

The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.

Table 6-14 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2a board.

Table 6-14 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 38.48 W

Weight 1.36 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

 

Table 6-15 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-15 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 384

A CIC(64K) 6,144

Gb Maximum payload throughput(physical layer) 128 Mbit/s

 

6.5 FG2c Board

FG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed

depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 19.

For the EPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.

6.5.1 Functions of the FG2c Board

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-21

Page 96: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 96/214

As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.

6.5.2 Panel of the FG2c Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.

6.5.3 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

6.5.4 Ports on the FG2c Board

There are 12 ports on the FG2c board.

6.5.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board

The technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative

humidity.

6.5.1 Functions of the FG2c Board

As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.

The FG2c board performs the following functions:

l Provides 12 channels over FE ports or four channels over GE ports

l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer 

l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

l Supports the transmission of data over all its Ethernet ports on the basis of the synchronized

clock signalsl Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces

NOTE

The FG2c board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.

6.5.2 Panel of the FG2c Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.

Figure 6-6 shows the panel of the FG2c board.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 97: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 97/214

Figure 6-6 Panel of the FG2c board

 

6.5.3 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-16 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Table 6-16 LEDs on the FG2c board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-23

Page 98: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 98/214

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Orange OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

6.5.4 Ports on the FG2c Board

There are 12 ports on the FG2c board.

Table 6-17 describes the ports on the FG2c board.

Table 6-17 Ports on the FG2c board

Port Function Connector

Type

100BASE-T 100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100M

signals

RJ45

100/1000BASE-T 100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to

transmit 100/1000M signals

RJ45

 

6.5.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board

The technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 99: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 99/214

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative

humidity.

Table 6-18 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2c board.

Table 6-18 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/

standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is

responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 85.4 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

 

Table 6-19 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-19 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 2,048

A CIC(64K) 23,040

Gb Maximum payload throughput (physical

layer)

1,024 Mbit/s

 

6.6 GCUa Board

GCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. The GCUa board is mandatory. Two GCUa boards

must be installed in slots 12 and 13 in the MPS.

6.6.1 Functions of the GCUa Board

The GCUa board provides the synchronization clock signals for the system.

6.6.2 Panel of the GCUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa board.

6.6.3 LEDs on the GCUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-25

Page 100: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 100/214

6.6.4 Ports on the GCUa Board

There are 17 ports on the GCUa board.

6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa Board

The technical specifications of the GCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.

6.6.1 Functions of the GCUa Board

The GCUa board provides the synchronization clock signals for the system.

The GCUa board performs the following functions:

l Traces, generates, and maintains the synchronization clock 

l The standby GCUa board traces the clock phase of the active GCUa board. This ensures

the smooth output of the clock phase in the case of active/standby switchover.

6.6.2 Panel of the GCUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa board.

Figure 6-7 shows the panel of the GCUa board.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 101: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 101/214

Figure 6-7 Panel of the GCUa board

 

6.6.3 LEDs on the GCUa Board

There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-20 describes the LEDs on the GCUa board.

Table 6-20 LEDs on the GCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-27

Page 102: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 102/214

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the

 board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

6.6.4 Ports on the GCUa Board

There are 17 ports on the GCUa board.

Table 6-21 describes the ports on the GCUa board.

Table 6-21 Ports on the GCUa board

Port Function Connector Type

ANT Reserved SMA male connector  

CLKOUT0 to CLKOUT9 Ports for transmitting

synchronization clock signals.

The ten ports are used to

transmit the 8 kHz clock 

signals to the CLKIN port on

the panel of the SCUa board.

RJ45

COM0, COM1 Reserved RJ45

TESTOUT Reserved SMB male connector  

TESTIN Input port for testing external

clock signals

SMB male connector 

CLKIN0, CLKIN1 Synchronization clock input

 port, used to receive the 2.048

MHz clock signals or 2.048

Mbit/s code stream signals

SMB male connector 

 

6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa Board

The technical specifications of the GCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.

Table 6-22 describes the technical specifications of the GCUa board.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 103: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 103/214

Table 6-22 Technical specifications of the GCUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption GCUa: 20 W

Weight GCUa: 1.1 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Clock accuracy grade Grade three

 

6.7 GOUa Board

GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends

on site requir ements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 or slots 24

to 27. For the EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.7.1 Functions of the GOUa Board

As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.

6.7.2 Panel of the GOUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.

6.7.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board

There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

6.7.4 Ports on the GOUa Board

There are four ports on the GOUa board.

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board

The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

6.7.1 Functions of the GOUa Board

As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.

The GOUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides two channels over GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmission

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-29

Page 104: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 104/214

l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and

standby boards

l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

l Supports the A and Abis interfaces

6.7.2 Panel of the GOUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.

Figure 6-8 shows the panel of the GOUa board.

Figure 6-8 Panel of the GOUa board

 

6.7.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board

There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 105: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 105/214

Table 6-23 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

Table 6-23 LEDs on the GOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

 

6.7.4 Ports on the GOUa Board

There are four ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-24 describes the ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-24 Ports on the GOUa board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical

signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,

and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

LC/PC

TX

2M0 and2M1

Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male connector  

 

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board

The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

Table 6-25 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUa board.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-31

Page 106: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 106/214

Table 6-25 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane

of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 37.30 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature

(long-term)

0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature

(short-term)

-5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity

(short-term)

5% to 95%

 

Table 6-26 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-26 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 384

A CIC(64K) 6,144

 

Table 6-27 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-27 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board

Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25 G-850nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP

Optical Module 1.25 G-1310nm-10 km-SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum optical

transmission

distance

0.5 km 10 km

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 107: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 107/214

Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25 G-850nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP

Optical Module 1.25 G-1310nm-10 km-SM-ESFP

Maximum outputoptical power 

-2.5 dBm -3.0 dBm

Minimum output

optical power 

-9.5 dBm -9.5 dBm

Minimum receiver 

sensitivity

-17.0 dBm -20.0 dBm

Overload receive

optical power 

0.0 dBm -3.0 dBm

Center wavelength 850 nm 1,310 nm

Transmission rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

 

6.8 GOUc Board

GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be

installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots

16 to 19. For the EPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.

6.8.1 Functions of the GOUc Board

As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.

6.8.2 Panel of the GOUc Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.

6.8.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board

There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),

and ACT (optical port LED).

6.8.4 Ports on the GOUc Board

There are four ports on the GOUc board.

6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board

The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

6.8.1 Functions of the GOUc Board

As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.

The GOUc board performs the following functions:

l Provides four channels over GE ports

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-33

Page 108: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 108/214

l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and

standby boards

l Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces

NOTE

The GOUc board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.

6.8.2 Panel of the GOUc Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.

Figure 6-9 shows the panel of the GOUc board.

Figure 6-9 Panel of the GOUc board

 

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 109: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 109/214

6.8.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board

There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),

and ACT (optical port LED).

Table 6-28 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Table 6-28 LEDs on the GOUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

LINK (optical

 port LED)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (optical

 port LED)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

6.8.4 Ports on the GOUc Board

There are four ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-29 describes the ports on the GOUc board.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-35

Page 110: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 110/214

Table 6-29 Ports on the GOUc board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical

signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

LC/PC

TX

 

6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board

The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

Table 6-30 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUc board.

Table 6-30 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The

 backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 65.90 W

Weight 1.40 kg

Operating temperature

(long-term)

0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature

(short-term)

-5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-

term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity

(short-term)

5% to 95%

 

Table 6-31 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-31 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 2,048

A CIC(64K) 23,040

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 111: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 111/214

Item Specification

Gb Maximum payload throughput (physical

layer)

1,024 Mbit/s

 

Table 6-32 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-32 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board

Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25G-1310 nm-10 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 1.25 G-850nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 850 nm

Transmission rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Transmission

distance

10 km 0.5 km

Maximum output

optical power 

-3 dBm -3 dBm

Minimum output

optical power 

-9.5 dBm -9 dBm

Minimum receiver 

sensitivity

-23 dBm -20 dBm

 

6.9 OIUa Board

OIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a. The OIUa board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of OIUa boards to be installeddepends on site requirements. For the MPS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19

and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS/TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.9.1 Functions of the OIUa Board

The OIUa board provides STM-1 transmission over the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces.

6.9.2 Panel of the OIUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the OIUa board.

6.9.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board

There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

6.9.4 Ports on the OIUa Board

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-37

Page 112: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 112/214

There are four ports on the OIUa board.

6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board

The technical specifications of the OIUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.

6.9.1 Functions of the OIUa Board

The OIUa board provides STM-1 transmission over the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces.

The OIUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides one STM-1 port for TDM transmission

l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and

standby OIUa boards

l Provides one channelized STM-1 with the transmission rate of 155.52 Mbit/s

l Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol

l Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol

l Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC side

l Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces

6.9.2 Panel of the OIUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the OIUa board.

Figure 6-10 shows the panel of the OIUa board.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 113: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 113/214

Figure 6-10 Panel of the OIUa board

 

6.9.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board

There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-33 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.

Table 6-33 LEDs on the OIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the

 board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-39

Page 114: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 114/214

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive

signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals

 properly.

 

6.9.4 Ports on the OIUa Board

There are four ports on the OIUa board.

Table 6-34 describes the ports on the OIUa board.

Table 6-34 Ports on the OIUa board

Port Function ConnectorType

RX TX refers to the transmitting optical port, and RX refers to the

receiving optical port.

LC

TX

2M0 and

2M1

Output ports for the 2.048 MHz clock signals, used to transmit

the clock signals extracted from the line clock for system

reference

SMB male

connector 

TESTO

UT

Output port for clock signals. The clock signals are used for 

testing.

SMB male

connector 

 

6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa BoardThe technical specifications of the OIUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

Table 6-35 describes the hardware specifications of the OIUa board.

Table 6-35 Hardware specifications of the OIUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 115: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 115/214

Item Specification

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane

of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 20.80 W

Weight 0.94 kg

Operating temperature

(long-term)

0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature

(short-term)

-5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-

term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity(short-term)

5% to 95%

 

Table 6-36 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-36 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 384

A CIC(64K) 1,920

Ater CIC(16K) 7,168

Pb CIC(16K) 7,168

 

Table 6-37 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the OIUa board.

Table 6-37 Specifications of the optical ports on the OIUa board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 155 M-1310nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

Transmission rate 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-41

Page 116: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 116/214

Item Specification

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 155 M-1310nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Transmission

distance

15 km 2 km

Maximum output

optical power 

-8 dBm -14 dBm

Minimum output

optical power 

-15 dBm -19 dBm

Maximum receiver 

sensitivity

-31 dBm -30 dBm

 

6.10 OMUa BoardOMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. The OMUa board is mandatory. One

or two OMUa boards must be configured in the BSC6900. The width of the OMUa board is

twice the width of other boards. Therefore, one OMUa board occupies two slots. The OMUa

 board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23

are recommended.

NOTE

This document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUa board is installed in slots20 to 23.

6.10.1 Functions of the OMUa Board

The OMUa board is the back administration module of the BSC6900. It works as a bridge for 

the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the

BSC6900.

6.10.2 Panel of the OMUa Board

There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa board. In addition, there are hard

disks installed on the OMUa board.

6.10.3 LEDs on the OMUa Board

There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HD, and OFFLINE.

6.10.4 Ports on the OMUa Board

There are nine ports on the OMUa board.

6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board

This describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the OMUa

 board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard disk capacity, memory

capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.

6.10.1 Functions of the OMUa Board

The OMUa board is the back administration module of the BSC6900. It works as a bridge for 

the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in theBSC6900.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 117: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 117/214

The OMUa board performs the following functions:

l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,

security management, and loading management functions for the system

l Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of theBSC6900 system, to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa

 board of the BSC6900

6.10.2 Panel of the OMUa Board

There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa board. In addition, there are hard

disks installed on the OMUa board.

Figure 6-11 shows the panel of the OMUa board.

Figure 6-11 Panel of the OMUa board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-43

Page 118: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 118/214

(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) RESET Button (8) SHUTDOWN Button

(9) USB port (10) ETH0 Ethernet port (11) ETH1 Ethernet port (12) ETH2 Ethernet port

(13) COM port (14) VGA port (15) HD LEDs (16) OFFLINE LED

(17) Hard disks (18) Screws for fixing the hard disk 

 

NOTE

l In a normal situation, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers away from

the front panel of the OMUa board. After the OFFLINE LED is on, turn off the power switch.

l The SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in emergency.

l The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works in the same way as the reset button on the PC.

l Powering off the board by pressing the SHUTDOWN button or resetting the system by pressing the

RESET button may scratch the surface of the hard disks of the OMUa board. Thus, avoid operating

the two buttons whenever possible.

6.10.3 LEDs on the OMUa Board

There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HD, and OFFLINE.

Table 6-38 describes the LEDs on the OMUa board.

Table 6-38 LEDs on the OMUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the

 board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is being switched over to

the other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operation

on the hard disk.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 119: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 119/214

LED Color Status Description

Blinking The hard disk is being read or  

written.

 

6.10.4 Ports on the OMUa Board

There are nine ports on the OMUa board.

Table 6-39 describes the ports on the OMUa board.

Table 6-39 Ports on the OMUa board

Port Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 USB ports. These ports are used to

connect USB devices.

-

ETH0 to ETH2 GE ports. RJ45

COM-ALM/COM-BMC Serial port. This port is used for 

system commissioning or for 

common serial port usage.

DB-9

VGA Monitor port -

 

6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board

This describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the OMUa

 board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard disk capacity, memory

capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.

Hardware Configuration Indexes

Table 6-40 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa board.

Table 6-40 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa board

Index Value

Size 366.7 mm x 220 mm

Power supply Two routes of -48 V DC in redundancy

 backup mode (provided by the backplane of 

the subrack)

Power consumption 190 W

Weight 4.6 kg

Hard disk capacity 146 GB x 2 (RAID 1)

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-45

Page 120: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 120/214

Index Value

Memory capacity 2 GB

Temperature required when working for a

long time

0℃-45℃

Temperature required when working for a

short time

-5℃-+55℃

Relative humidity required when working for 

a long time

5%-85%

Relative humidity required when working for 

a short time

5%-95%

 

Performance Counters

Table 6-41 describes the performance counters of the OMUa board.

Table 6-41 Performance counters of the OMUa board

Counter Value

 Number of recorded

alarms

The maximum number of recorded alarms is 1,50,000.

Time when the standby

OMU data is

synchronized with the

active OMU data

The standby OMUa board synchronizes its data with that of the

active OMUa board every second.

Period of the

synchronization between

the active OMU files and

standby OMU files

Five minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies

according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.

Time taken for the

switchover of active/

standby OMUa boards

In normal cases, the switchover of active/standby OMUa boards

takes about 2 to 5 minutes (excluding the time taken for the

synchronization between active OMU data and standby OMU

data).

Time taken for starting

the OMUa board

If the OMUa board is faulty, it takes about two minutes for the

OMUa board to be started.

 

6.11 PAMU BoardPAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power 

distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU

 board.

6.11.1 Functions of the PAMU Board

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 121: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 121/214

The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900

cabinet.

6.11.2 Panel of the PAMU Board

On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.

6.11.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board

There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

6.11.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board

The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board

The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, and weight.

6.11.1 Functions of the PAMU Board

The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900cabinet.

The PAMU board performs the following functions:

l Detects the voltage of six -48 V power inputs and reports related alarms

l Detects the status of the power switches for 20 power outputs and reports related alarms

l Enables the switchover when faults occur in the serial port communication, and

communicates with the SCUa board

l Provides two RS485 and two RS232 asynchronous serial ports

6.11.2 Panel of the PAMU BoardOn the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.

Figure 6-12 shows the panel of the PAMU board.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-47

Page 122: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 122/214

Figure 6-12 Panel of the PAMU board

(1) RUN LED (2) ALM LED (3) Mute switch

 

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.

l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is

faulty.

l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when

it is faulty.

6.11.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board

There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

Table 6-42 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

Table 6-42 LEDs on the PAMU board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The PAMU board is functional and

communicates with the SCUa board

 properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF

for 0.25s

The PAMU board is faulty or it does not

communicate with the SCUa board

 properly.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 123: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 123/214

LED Color Status Description

OFF The power supply to the PAMU board

is abnormal or the power distribution

 box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.

During the self-check of the PAMU

 board, however, the ALM LED is also

ON. This indicates that the ALM LED

is functional.

 

6.11.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU BoardThe PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 6-13 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

Figure 6-13 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

 

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.

To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table

6-43.

Table 6-43 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-49

Page 124: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 124/214

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 6-43.

6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board

The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, and weight.

Table 6-44 describes the technical specifications of the PAMU board.

Table 6-44 Technical specifications of the PAMU board

Item Specification

Dimensions 340 mm × 72 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode

Power consumption 15 W

Weight 0.2 kg

 

6.12 PEUa BoardPEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.

It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed

depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19

and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.12.1 Functions of the PEUa Board

As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.

6.12.2 Panel of the PEUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.

6.12.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board

There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

6.12.4 Ports on the PEUa Board

There are six ports on the PEUa board.

6.12.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board

The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

6.12.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board

The technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative

humidity.

6.12.1 Functions of the PEUa Board

As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.

The PEUa board performs the following functions:

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 125: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 125/214

l Provides 32 channels of IP over PPP/MLPPP over E1/T1

l Provides 128 PPP links or 32 MLPPP groups, each MLPPP group containing 8 MLPPP

links

l Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby PEUa

 boards

l Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 channels of E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission

rate is 2.048 Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.

l Supports the Abis and Gb interfaces

6.12.2 Panel of the PEUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.

Figure 6-14 shows the panel of the PEUa board.

Figure 6-14 Panel of the PEUa board

 

6.12.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board

There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-51

Page 126: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 126/214

Table 6-45 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 6-45 LEDs on the PEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

 

6.12.4 Ports on the PEUa Board

There are six ports on the PEUa board.

Table 6-46 describes the ports on the PEUa board.

Table 6-46 Ports on the PEUa board

Port Function ConnectorType

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1

signals on channels 0-7

DB44

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1signals on channels 8-15

DB44

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1

signals on channels 16-23

DB44

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1

signals on channels 24-31

DB44

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 127: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 127/214

Port Function ConnectorType

2M0 and 2M1 Output ports for clock signals. These ports are

used to transmit the 2 MHz line clock signals

to the GCUa/GCGa board. The clock signals

are extracted from upper-level devices and

serve as the clock sources of the BSC6900

system.

SMB male

connector 

 

6.12.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board

The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Figure 6-15 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

Figure 6-15 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-53

Page 128: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 128/214

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom

 plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.

l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-15, there are two

square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-

 board, and thus you can set S10 along the side.The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-15 is to turn

inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or 

S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of 

S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.

l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between

the physical setting of S10 on the AEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by

command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET

E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,

E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for 

 balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must

also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced

mode.l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals

are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair 

cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding

of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1

 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-47 describes S2, S4, S6,

S8, and S10.

Table 6-47 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning 

S2 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 129: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 129/214

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning 

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting theworking mode,

consisting of two bits

(ON, ON) Setting theworking mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the

working mode to

E1 balanced

mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the

working mode to

T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the

working mode to

J1 mode

 

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are

set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

6.12.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa BoardThe technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative

humidity.

Table 6-48 describes the hardware specifications of the PEUa board.

Table 6-48 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-55

Page 130: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 130/214

Item Specification

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 27.53 W

Weight 1.30 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

 

Table 6-49 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-49 S pecifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 384

Gb Maximum payload

throughput (physical layer)

64 Mbit/s

 

6.13 PFCU Board

PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each

fan box is configured with one PFCU board.

6.13.1 Functions of the PFCU Board

The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.

6.13.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP

switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a

fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board

is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

6.13.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board

The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,

frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed

adjustment.

6.13.1 Functions of the PFCU Board

The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 131: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 131/214

The PFCU board performs the following functions:

l Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the

LED

l

Communicates with the SCUa board, to report the working status of the fan boxl Collects temperature information and detects the temperature through temperature sensors

l Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan

speed

l Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.13.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board

The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP

switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a

fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU boardis configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)

Figure 6-16 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-16 DIP switch on the PFCU board

 

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in

Table 6-50. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the

address of the PFCU board is 1.

Table 6-50 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description

SW1 1 (the least significant

 bit)

OFF 1

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-57

Page 132: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 132/214

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)

Figure 6-17 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-17 DIP switch on the PFCU board

 

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in

Table 6-51. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the

address of the PFCU board is 4.

Table 6-51 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description

SW1 1 (the least significant

 bit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

6.13.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board

The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,

frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed

adjustment.

Table 6-52 describes the technical specifications of the PFCU board.

Table 6-52 Technical specifications of the PFCU board

Item Specification

Dimensions 270 mm x 35 mm

Input voltage range -42 V DC to -60 V DC

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 133: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 133/214

Item Specification

Frequency of PWM signals 1 kHz

Detectable temperature range -5ºC to +55ºC (basic requirement)

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%

to 100% of the full speed.

 

6.14 PFCB BoardPFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each

fan box is configured with one PFCB board.

6.14.1 Functions of the PFCB BoardThe PFCB board is used to monitor the fan box.

6.14.2 Pins on the PFCB Board

The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,

these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these

 pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

6.14.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board

The technical specifications of the PFCB board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,

frequency of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals, detectable temperature range, and

requirement for fan speed adjustment.

6.14.1 Functions of the PFCB BoardThe PFCB board is used to monitor the fan box.

The PFCB board performs the following functions:

l Monitor s the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the

LED

l Communicates with the SCUa board, to report the working status of the fan box, and

responds to the fan speed adjustment command

l Collects temperature information through temperature sensors and intelligently adjusts the

fan speed based on the temperature information

l Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fanspeed

l Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.14.2 Pins on the PFCB Board

The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,

these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these

 pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

Pins on the PFCB Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)

Figure 6-18 shows the pins on the PFCB board.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-59

Page 134: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 134/214

Figure 6-18 Pins on the PFCB board

 

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described

in Table 6-53.

Table 6-53 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

PinNumber

1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16

Connec

ted to

 jumper

 No No No No Yes No No No

 

Pins on the PFCB Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)

Figure 6-19 shows the pins on the PFCB board.

Figure 6-19 Pins on the PFCB board

 

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described

in Table 6-54.

Table 6-54 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack)

PinNumber

1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16

Connec

ted to

 jumper

 No No No No No No Yes No

 

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 135: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 135/214

NOTE

The pins on the PFCB board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

6.14.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board

The technical specifications of the PFCB board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,

frequency of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals, detectable temperature range, and

requirement f or fan speed adjustment.

Table 6-55 describes the technical specifications of the PFCB board.

Table 6-55 Technical specifications of the PFCB board

Item Specification

Dimensions 390 mm × 50 mm

Input voltage range -42 V DC to -60 V DC

Frequency of PWM signals 1 kHz

Detectable temperature range -5ºC to +55ºC (basic requirement)

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%

to 100% of the full speed.

 

6.15 POUc BoardPOUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The

POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of POUc

 boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can be

installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed in

slots 14 to 27.

6.15.1 Functions of the POUc Board

As an interface board, the POUc board supports IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3 transmission.

6.15.2 Panel of the POUc Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.

6.15.3 LEDs on the POUc Board

There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

6.15.4 Ports on the POUc Board

There are four ports on the POUc board.

6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board

The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-61

Page 136: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 136/214

6.15.1 Functions of the POUc Board

As an interface board, the POUc board supports IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3 transmission.

The POUc board performs the following functions:

l Provides four channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on IP protocol

l Supports the PPP function

l Extracts line clock signals

l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and

standby POUc boards

l Supports the A, Abis, Gb, Ater, and Pb interfaces

6.15.2 Panel of the POUc Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.

Figure 6-20 shows the panel of the POUc board.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 137: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 137/214

Figure 6-20 Panel of the POUc board

 

6.15.3 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-56 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 6-56 LEDs on the POUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading state.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-63

Page 138: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 138/214

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive

signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals

 properly.

 

6.15.4 Ports on the POUc Board

There are four ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-57 describes the ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-57 Ports on the POUc board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical

signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,

and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

LC/PC

TX

 

6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board

The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

Table 6-58 describes the hardware specifications of the POUc board.

Table 6-58 Hardware specifications of the POUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 139: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 139/214

Item Specification

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 77.25 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

 

Table 6-59 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM

transmission mode.

Table 6-59 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM transmission

mode

Item Specification

Abis TRX 512

A CIC(64K) 3,906

Ater CIC(16K) 7,168

Pb CIC(16K) 7,168

Gb Maximum payload throughput (physical

layer)

504 Mbit/s

 

Table 6-60 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP

transmission mode.

Table 6-60 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP transmission

mode

Item Specification

Abis TRX 2,048

A CIC(64K) 23,040

Ater CIC(16K) 23,040 (The TC subrack supports

only 13,000 CICs.)

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-65

Page 140: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 140/214

Table 6-61 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in HDLC

transmission mode.

Table 6-61 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in HDLC transmission

mode

Item Specification

Abis TRX 2,048

 

Table 6-62 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-62 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-40 km-SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum

optical

transmission

distance

2 km 15 km 40 km

Maximum

output optical

 power 

-14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm

Minimum

output optical

 power 

-19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm

Minimum

receiver 

sensitivity

-30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm

Center 

wavelength

1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

Transmission

rate

155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s

 

6.16 SCUa Board

SCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.

Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 141: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 141/214

6.16.1 Functions of the SCUa Board

The SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the

subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and

the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between all modules of the

BSC6900.

6.16.2 Panel of the SCUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.

6.16.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board

Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

6.16.4 Ports on the SCUa Board

There are 15 ports on the SCUa board.

6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board

The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.

6.16.1 Functions of the SCUa Board

The SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the

subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and

the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between all modules of the

BSC6900.

The SCUa board performs the following functions:

l

Provides the maintenance management functionl Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900

l Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinet

l Supports the port trunking function

l Supports the active/standby switchover 

l Enables inter-subrack connections

l Provides a total switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s

l Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900

6.16.2 Panel of the SCUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.

Figure 6-21 shows the panel of the SCUa board.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-67

Page 142: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 142/214

Figure 6-21 Panel of the SCUa board

 

6.16.3 LEDs on the SCUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-63 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

Table 6-63 LEDs on the SCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 143: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 143/214

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

6.16.4 Ports on the SCUa Board

There are 15 ports on the SCUa board.

Table 6-64 describes the ports on the SCUa board.

Table 6-64 Ports on the SCUa board

Port Function ConnectorType

10/100/100

0BASE-T0

to

10/100/100

0BASE-

T11

10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used for the inter-

subrack connection

RJ45

COM Serial port for commissioning RJ45

CLKIN Input port for reference clock signals, used to receive the 8

kHz clock signals from the GCUa board

RJ45

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-69

Page 144: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 144/214

Port Function ConnectorType

TESTOUT Output port for clock signals. The clock signals are used for 

testing.

SMB male

connector 

 

6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board

The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, r elative humidity, and switching capacity.

Table 6-65 describes the technical specifications of the SCUa board.

Table 6-65 Technical specifications of the SCUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 54.5 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Switching capacity 60 Gbit/s

 

6.17 TNUa Board

TNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. One or two

TNUa boards can be installed in slots 4 and 5 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.

6.17.1 Functions of the TNUa Board

The TNUa board provides the TDM switching and serves as the switching center for the CS

services of the entire system.

6.17.2 Panel of the TNUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the TNUa board.

6.17.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board

There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

6.17.4 Ports on the TNUa Board

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 145: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 145/214

There are six ports on the TNUa board.

6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board

The technical specifications of the TNUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.

6.17.1 Functions of the TNUa Board

The TNUa board provides the TDM switching and serves as the switching center for the CS

services of the entire system.

The TNUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides 128 kbit/s x 128 kbit/s TDM switching

l Allocates the TDM network resources

6.17.2 Panel of the TNUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the TNUa board.

Figure 6-22 shows the panel of the TNUa board.

Figure 6-22 Panel of the TNUa board

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-71

Page 146: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 146/214

 

6.17.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board

There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-66 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.

Table 6-66 LEDs on the TNUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power  

supply, or the board is

faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

 

6.17.4 Ports on the TNUa Board

There are six ports on the TNUa board.

Table 6-67 describes the ports on the TNUa board.

Table 6-67 Ports on the TNUa board

Port Function Connector Type

TDM0-TDM5 TDM high-speed serial ports,

used to connect the TNUa

 boards in different subracks

DB14

 

NOTE

The BSC6900 supports the inter-TNUa connections between the MPS and the EPS. It also supports theinter-TNUa connections between the TCSs.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 147: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 147/214

6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board

The technical specifications of the TNUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.

Table 6-68 describes the technical specifications of the TNUa board.

Table 6-68 Technical specifications of the TNUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/

standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is

responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 31.20 W

Weight 1.00 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

 

6.18 XPUa Board

XPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to ten

XPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed

in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can

 be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 13, and slots 14 to 27.

6.18.1 Functions of the XPUa Board

Loaded with different software, the XPUa board is functionally divided into main control XPUa

 board and non-main control XPUa board. The main control XPUa board is used to manage the

GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system

and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUa board is usedto process the GSM services on the control plane.

6.18.2 Panel of the XPUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUa board.

6.18.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board

Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

6.18.4 Ports on the XPUa Board

There are four ports on the XPUa board.

6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-73

Page 148: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 148/214

The technical specifications of the XPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

6.18.1 Functions of the XPUa Board

Loaded with different software, the XPUa board is functionally divided into main control XPUa

 board and non-main control XPUa board. The main control XPUa board is used to manage the

GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system

and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUa board is used

to process the GSM services on the control plane.

Main Control XPUa Board

The main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.

Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUa board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to

manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the

system. The functions are described as follows:

l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources

 between subracks

l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load

information on the control planes between subracks

l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-

RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query

l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane

resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900

Subsystems 1 to 3 of the main control XPUa board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which

is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces

l Processing transport layer signaling

l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connections

l Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control XPUa Board

The non-main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.

The four subsystems of the non-main control XPUa board belong to the CPUS, which is used

to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces

l Processing transport layer signaling

l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connections

l Processing RFN signaling

6.18.2 Panel of the XPUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUa board.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 149: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 149/214

Figure 6-23 shows the panel of the XPUa board.

Figure 6-23 Panel of the XPUa board

 

6.18.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board

Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-69 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.

Table 6-69 LEDs on the XPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-75

Page 150: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 150/214

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Green OFF There is no data transmission over  

the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the

Ethernet port.

 

6.18.4 Ports on the XPUa Board

There are four ports on the XPUa board.

Table 6-70 describes the ports on the XPUa board.

Table 6-70 Ports on the XPUa board

Port Function Connector Type

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to

10/100/1000BASE-T3

10M/100M/1000M Ethernet

 ports

RJ45

 

6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board

The technical specifications of the XPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

Table 6-71 describes the technical specifications of the XPUa board.

Table 6-71 Technical specifications of the XPUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 151: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 151/214

Item Specification

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 75.40 W

Weight 1.60 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main controlXPUa board Supporting 270 TRXs, 384 cells, 384 BTSs, and492,000 Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCAs)

Processing capability of the non-main

control XPUa board

Supporting 360 TRXs, 384 cells, 384 BTSs, and

656,000 BHCAs

 

NOTE

The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can be

calculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.

6.19 XPUb Board

XPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to ten

XPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards can

 be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUb

 boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 13, and slots 14 to 27.

6.19.1 Functions of the XPUb Board

Loaded with different software, the XPUb board is functionally divided into main control XPUb

 board and non-main control XPUb board. The main control XPUb board is used to manage the

GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system

and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUb board is usedto process the GSM services on the control plane.

6.19.2 Panel of the XPUb Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUb board.

6.19.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board

Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

6.19.4 Ports on the XPUb Board

There are four ports on the XPUb board.

6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-77

Page 152: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 152/214

The technical specifications of the XPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

6.19.1 Functions of the XPUb Board

Loaded with different software, the XPUb board is functionally divided into main control XPUb

 board and non-main control XPUb board. The main control XPUb board is used to manage the

GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system

and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUb board is used

to process the GSM services on the control plane.

Main Control XPUb Board

The main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.

Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUb board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to

manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the

system. The functions are described as follows:

l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources

 between subracks

l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load

information on the control planes between subracks

l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-

RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query

l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane

resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900

Subsystems 1 to 7 of the main control XPUb board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which

is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces

l Processing transport layer signaling

l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connections

l Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control XPUb Board

The non-main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.

The eight subsystems of the non-main control XPUb board belong to the CPUS, which is used

to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces

l Processing transport layer signaling

l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connections

l Processing RFN signaling

6.19.2 Panel of the XPUb Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUb board.

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 153: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 153/214

Figure 6-24 shows the panel of the XPUb board.

Figure 6-24 Panel of the XPUb board

 

6.19.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board

Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-72 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.

Table 6-72 LEDs on the XPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-79

Page 154: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 154/214

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Orange OFF There is no data transmission over  

the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the

Ethernet port.

 

6.19.4 Ports on the XPUb Board

There are four ports on the XPUb board.

Table 6-73 describes the ports on the XPUb board.

Table 6-73 Ports on the XPUb board

Port Function Connector Type

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to

10/100/1000BASE-T3

10M/100M/1000M Ethernet

 ports

RJ45

 

6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board

The technical specifications of the XPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

Table 6-74 describes the technical specifications of the XPUb board.

Table 6-74 Technical specifications of the XPUb board

Item Specification

Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm

6 Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

6-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 155: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 155/214

Item Specification

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 52.3 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0ºC to 45ºC

Operating temperature (short-term) -5ºC to +55ºC

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main controlXPUb board Supporting 640 TRXs, 768 cells, 768 BTSs, and1,148,000 BHCAs

Processing capability of the non-main

control XPUb board

Supporting 640 TRXs, 768 cells, 768 BTSs, and

1,312,000 BHCAs

 

NOTE

The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can be

calculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-81

Page 156: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 156/214

Page 157: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 157/214

7 Cables

About This Chapter

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

7.1 Power Ca bles

The power ca bles are mandatory and are of two categories, that is, external power cables and

internal power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.

7.2 PGND Cables

The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for 

the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan

subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.

7.3 Optical Cable

The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board to

the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed

depends on the site requirements.

7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable

The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial

cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby

EIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk 

signals.

7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial CableThe active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of 

active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable

connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1

signals.

7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm

twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the

active/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.

7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable

The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. Thenumber of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

Page 158: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 158/214

connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/

T1 signals.

7.8 Inter-TNUa Cable

The inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that are

located in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installeddepends on the site requirements.

7.9 BITS Clock Cable

The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock 

cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals

to the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clock 

signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversion

cables.

7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable

The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped

clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHzclock signals from the GCUa board in the MPS to the SCUa board in the EPS.

7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable

The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to

transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the

GCUa board.

7.12 Straight-Through Cable

The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded

straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards

in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/

FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of straight-

through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack 

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the

service subracks.

7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable

The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You

can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the

alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.

7.15 Monitor ing Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from

the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.

7.16 EMU R S485 Communication Cable

The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and

the EMU.

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 159: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 159/214

7.1 Power Cables

The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories, that is, external power cables and

internal power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.

The external power cables lead the power from the power distribution frame (PDF) to the power 

distribution box. The external power cables need to be installed on site. The internal power cables

lead the power from the power distribution box to the modules inside the cabinet. The internal

 power cables are installed before delivery.

Table 7-1 shows the external power cables. Table 7-2, Table 7-3 shows the internal power 

cables.

Table 7-1 External power cables

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

ConnectorType 1/ InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Externa

l -48 V

 power 

cable

Blue 25/35 OT terminal/-48

V DC input port

on the power 

distribution box

OT

terminal/-48 V

DC output port

on the PDF

Four per cabinet

Externa

l RTN

 power cable

Black 25/35 OT terminal/-48

V DC input port

on the power distribution box

OT

terminal/-48 V

DC output porton the PDF

Four per cabinet

 

Table 7-2 Internal power cables for subracks

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

ConnectorType 1/ InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Internal

-48 V

DC

 power 

cable

Blue 10 OT

terminal/-48 V

DC input port

on the power 

distribution

 box

OT

terminal/-48 V

DC output port

on the subrack 

Two per subrack 

Internal

RTN

 power 

cable

Black 10 OT

terminal/-48 V

DC input port

on the power 

distribution

 box

OT

terminal/-48 V

DC output port

on the subrack 

Two per subrack 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

Page 160: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 160/214

 

Table 7-3 Internal power cables for the independent fan subrack 

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

ConnectorType 1/ InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Internal

-48 V

DC

 power 

cable

Blue 2 OT

terminal/-48 V

DC input port

on the power 

distribution

 box

D-type

connector/

 power input

 port on the

independent

fan subrack 

Two per independent

fan subrack 

Internal

RTN

 power 

cable

Black 2 OT

terminal/-48 V

DC input port

on the power 

distribution

 box

D-type

connector/

 power input

 port on the

independent

fan subrack 

Two per independent

fan subrack 

 

The internal power cable for subracks and the external power cable have the same appearance,

as shown in Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Internal power cable for subracks/External power cable

 

Figure 7-2 shows the internal power cable for the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack 

 

7.2 PGND Cables

The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for 

the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fansubrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 161: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 161/214

Each cabinet must be configured with one external PGND cable. When the cabinets are

combined, three inter-cabinet PGND cables must be installed between every two adjacent

cabinets. Other PGND cables are already installed in the cabinet before delivery.

Table 7-4 describes the PGND cables.

Table 7-4 PGND cables

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

Connector Type1/ InstallationPosition1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

External

PGNDcable

Green and

yellow

25/35 OT

terminal/Groundin

g bolt at

the top

rear of 

each

cabinet

OT terminal/

PGND output port on the PDF

One per 

cabinet

Inter-

cabinet

PGND

cable

Green and

yellow

6 OT

terminal/

PGND

 busbar of 

eachcabinet

OT terminal/

PGND busbar of 

each cabinet

Three

 between

every two

adjacent

cabinets

PGND

cable for 

the power 

distributio

n box

Green and

yellow

6 OT

terminal/

PGND

 busbar of 

each

cabinet

OT terminal/Port

for PGND cable

on the power 

distribution box

One per 

 power 

distribution

 box

PGND

cable for 

the subrack 

Green and

yellow

6 OT

terminal/

PGND

 busbar of 

each

cabinet

OT terminal/Port

for the PGND

cable on the

subrack 

Two per 

subrack 

PGND

cable for 

the cabinet

door 

Green and

yellow

6 OT

terminal/

Groundin

g bolt on

the base

OT terminal/

Grounding bolt

on the cabinet

door 

Eight per 

cabinet

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

Page 162: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 162/214

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

Connector Type1/ Installati

onPosition1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

PGND

cable for 

the

independe

nt fan

subrack 

Green and

yellow

6 OT

terminal/

PGND

 busbar of 

each

cabinet

OT terminal/

Grounding point

of the

independent fan

subrack 

One per 

independent

fan subrack 

 

The PGND cable for the independent fan subrack is different from the other PGND cables for 

the BSC6900. Figure 7-3 shows the PGND cable for the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-4

shows the other PGND cables.

Figure 7-3 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack 

 

Figure 7-4 Other PGND cables

 

7.3 Optical Cable

The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board to

the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed

depends on the site requirements.

Classification of the Optical Cable

According to the types of optical connectors at both ends of the cable, the optical cable can be

classified into the following types:

l LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable

l LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable

l LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 163: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 163/214

NOTE

l In actual installation, the LC/PC optical connector at one end of the cable is connected to the optical

interface board in the BSC6900, and the connector type at the other end of the cable depends on site

requirements.

l The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable connects the optical interface board to theODF or other NEs or connects the optical interface boards.

l In practice, two optical cables form a pair. Both ends of each cable in the pair are attached with

temporary labels. If one end of the cable is connected to the TX port, the other end should be connected

to the RX port.

CAUTION

The TX end and RX end of each optical cable must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the optical

signals cannot be received or transmitted.

BSC6900 Optical Cables

Table 7-5 shows the optical cables used in the BSC6900.

Table 7-5 BSC6900 optical cables

Optical Cable Type Appearance

LC/PC-LC/PC single-

mode/multi-mode

LC/PC-FC/PC single-

mode/multi-mode

LC/PC-SC/PC single-

mode/multi-mode

 

Installation

The optical cable has an LC/PC connector at one end connected to the optical interface board

in the BSC6900. The other end of the optical cable can use an LC/PC connector, SC/PC

connector, or FC/PC connector as required. Figure 7-5 shows the installation positions of the

optical cable.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-7

Page 164: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 164/214

Figure 7-5 Installation positions of the optical cable

7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable

The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxialcables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby

EIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk 

signals.

The 75-ohm coaxial cable used in the BSC6900 has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the 75-ohm coaxial

cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All of the

16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.

Appearance

Figure 7-6 shows the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 165: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 165/214

Figure 7-6 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the

cable)

(3) Label (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector 

 

The 75-ohm coaxial cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a connector 

to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Pin Assignment

The outer shielding layer of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the metal

case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-6 describes the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors

for the micro coaxial cables of the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Table 7-6 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables

Pin ofDB44Connector

 W1 Remarks Pin ofDB44Connector

 W2 Remarks

Signal MicroCoaxial CableIdentifier

Signal MicroCoaxial CableIdentifier

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3

21 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-9

Page 166: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 166/214

Pin ofDB44Connector

 W1 Remarks Pin ofDB44Connector

 W2 Remarks

Signal MicroCoaxial CableIdentifier

Signal MicroCoaxial CableIdentifier

19 Tip 26 Tip

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

 

Table 7-7 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-6.

Table 7-7 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable

Signal Bearer

Ring Shielding layer of micro coaxial cables

Tip Core of micro coaxial cables

 

Installation

One end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/PEUa

 board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial CableThe active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of 

active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable

connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1

signals.

Appearance

The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the active/standby 75-ohm

coaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All

of the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.

Figure 7-7 shows the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 167: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 167/214

Figure 7-7 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector  

(3) Label 1 (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the

cable)

(5) Label 2 (identifying a coaxial cable)

 

The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You need

to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Table 7-8 and Table 7-10 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/

standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4

X1 W3 Remarks

X1 W4 Remarks

Pin ofDB44Connector

Signal MicroCoaxialCableIdentifier

Pin ofDB44Connector

Signal MicroCoaxialCableIdentifier

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3

21 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

19 Tip 26 Tip

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-11

Page 168: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 168/214

X1 W3 Remarks

X1 W4 Remarks

Pin ofDB44Connector

Signal MicroCoaxialCableIdentifier

Pin ofDB44Connector

Signal MicroCoaxialCableIdentifier

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

 

NOTE

In Table 7-8, T1 indicates the first-route E1 TX signal, and R1 indicates the first-route E1 RX signal.

Similarly, RN indicates the Nth-route E1 RX signal, and TN indicates the Nth-route E1 TX signal.

Table 7-9 describes the signals of the micro coaxial cables listed in Table 7-8.

Table 7-9 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable

Signal Bearer

Ring Shielding layer of coaxial cables

Tip Core of coaxial cables

 

Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2

 W2 W1

Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

Remarks Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

Remarks

38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR  

23 23 30 30

37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR  

22 22 29 29

36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR  

21 21 28 28

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 169: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 169/214

 W2 W1

Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

Remarks Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

Remarks

35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR  

20 20 27 27

34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR  

19 19 26 26

33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR  

18 18 25 25

32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR  

17 17 24 24

31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR  

16 16 7 7

 

NOTE

In Table 7-10, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layer 

of the twisted pair cable.

Installation

The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable are connected

to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial

cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE through

transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable can also be

connected to another NE directly.

Figure 7-8 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables.

Figure 7-8 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-13

Page 170: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 170/214

 

7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm

twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the

active/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.

Appearance

Figure 7-9 shows the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-9 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of  

the cable)

(3) Label (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector 

 

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a

connector to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Pin Assignment

The outer shielding layer of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the

metal case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-11 describes the pin assignment of the DB44

connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 171: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 171/214

Table 7-11 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable

Pin ofDB44Connec

tor

 W1 Color Pin ofDB44Connec

tor

 W2 Color

Signal 120-

OhmTwistedPairCableIdentifier

Signal 120-

OhmTwistedPairCableIdentifier

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/T- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/T+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/T- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/T+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/T- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/T+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/T- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/T+ White

34 Ring/R- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/R+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/R- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/R+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/R- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/R+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/R- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/R+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

 

Table 7-12 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-11.

Table 7-12 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable

Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1

signals

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1

signals

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-15

Page 172: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 172/214

Signal Bearer

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1

signals

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals

 

Installation

One end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/

PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair CableThe active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The

number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable

connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/

T1 signals.

Appearance

Figure 7-10 shows the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-10 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector  

(3) Label 1 (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer 

of the cable)

(5) Label 2 (identifying a twisted pair cable)

 

The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You

need to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Table 7-13 and Table 7-15 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 173: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 173/214

Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4

X1 W3 Color X1 W4 Color

Pin of

DB44Connector

Signal Twiste

d PairCableIdentifier

Pin of

DB44Connector

Signal Twiste

d PairCableIdentifier

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/R- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/R+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/R- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/R+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/R- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/R+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/R- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/R+ White

34 Ring/T- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/T+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/T- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/T+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/T- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/T+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/T- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/T+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

 

NOTE

In Table 7-13, R- and R+ stand for reception signals; T- and T+ stand for transmission signals.

Table 7-14 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-13.

Table 7-14 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable

Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals

to the BSC6900

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1

signals to the BSC6900

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-17

Page 174: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 174/214

Signal Bearer

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals

from the BSC6900

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1signals from the BSC6900

 

Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2

Twisted Pair Cable W2 Remarks Twisted Pair Cable W1 Remarks

Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR  

23 23 30 30

37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR  

22 22 29 29

36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR  

21 21 28 28

35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR  

20 20 27 27

34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR  

19 19 26 26

33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR  

18 18 25 25

32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR  

17 17 24 24

31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR  

16 16 7 7

 

NOTE

In Table 7-15, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layer 

of the twisted pair cable.

Installation

The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable areconnected to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 175: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 175/214

120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another 

 NE through transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair 

cable can also be connected to another NE directly.

Figure 7-11 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Figure 7-11 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables

 

7.8 Inter-TNUa Cable

The inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that arelocated in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installed

depends on the site requirements.

Appearance

Figure 7-12 shows the inter-TNUa cable.

Figure 7-12 Inter-TNUa cable

(1) DB14 (2) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables)

(3) Main label (identifying the code, version, and

manufacturer of the cable)

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-19

Page 176: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 176/214

Installation

The two DB14 connectors at one end of the inter-TNUa cable are connected to the active and

standby TNUa boards in one subrack. The two DB14 connectors at the other end of the inter-

TNUa cable are connected to the active and standby TNUa boards in another subrack.

Figure 7-13 shows the installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables.

Figure 7-13 Installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables

 

7.9 BITS Clock Cable

The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 177: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 177/214

to the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clock 

signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversion

cables.

AppearanceFigure 7-14 shows the 75-ohm coaxial clock cable.

Figure 7-14 75-ohm coaxial clock cable

(1) SMB connector (2) Label

 

Figure 7-15 shows the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Figure 7-15 120-ohm clock conversion cable

(1) SMB connector 2Label

 

NOTE

The 120-ohm clock conversion cable has two SMB connectors at one end. Only one SMB connector is

used, and the other SMB connector is bound to the wire bushing by using cable ties. Pay attention to the

connection when using the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Installation

One end of the BITS clock signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the

GCUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the BITS clock source.

Figure 7-16 shows the installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-21

Page 178: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 178/214

Figure 7-16 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables

 

7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable

The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped

clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz

clock signals from the GCUa board in the MPS to the SCUa board in the EPS.

NOTE

The Y-shaped clock cable is not required if the BSC6900 is configured with only one MPS and no EPS.

Appearance

Figure 7-17 shows the Y-shaped clock cable.

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 179: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 179/214

Figure 7-17 Y-shaped clock cable

(1) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables) (2) RJ45 connector  

 

Installation

The RJ45 connector at one end of the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to the SCUa board in

the EPS. The two RJ45 connectors at the other end of the cable are connected to the active and

standby GCUa boards in the MPS.

Figure 7-18 shows the installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables.

Figure 7-18 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-23

Page 180: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 180/214

7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable

The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to

transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the

GCUa board.

NOTE

When the interface board providing line clock signals is located in the MPS, the line clock signals are sent

to the GCUa board through the backplane of the subrack. In this case, the line clock signal cable is not

required.

Appearance

Figure 7-19 shows the line clock signal cable.

Figure 7-19 Line clock signal cable

(1) SMB connector 

 

InstallationOne end of the line clock signal cable is connected to the 2M0 or the 2M1 port on the interface

 board. The other end of the signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the

GCUa board.

7.12 Straight-Through Cable

The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded

straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards

in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/

FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of straight-through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

Appearance

Figure 7-20 shows the shielded straight-through cable.

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 181: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 181/214

Figure 7-20 Shielded straight-through cable

 

NOTE

X1 and X2 are shielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-21 shows the unshielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-21 Unshielded straight-through cable

 

NOTE

X1 and X2 are unshielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the unshielded straight-through cable.

Pin Assignment

Table 7-16 describes the pins in the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-

through cable and the unshielded straight-through cable.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-25

Page 182: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 182/214

Table 7-16 Pins of the straight-through cable

X1 End Wire Color X2 End Wire Color

X1-1 White and orange X2-1 White and orange

X1-2 Orange X2-2 Orange

X1-3 White and green X2-3 White and green

X1-4 Blue X2-4 Blue

X1-5 White and blue X2-5 White and blue

X1-6 Green X2-6 Green

X1-7 White and brown X2-7 White and brown

X1-8 Brown X2-8 Brown

 

Installation

l When the unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different

subracks, the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the cable are connected to the SCUa boards

that are located in different subracks, as shown in Figure 7-22.

Figure 7-22 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the

SCUa boards in different subracks

 

l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the OMUa board to other 

devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to ETH0 or ETH1 on the

OMUa board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the

Ethernet port on the other devices.

l

When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/FG2c board to other devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 183: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 183/214

FG2a/FG2c board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the

Ethernet port on the other devices.

l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the XPUa/XPUb board to the

CBC, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the

XPUa/XPUb board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected toan Ethernet port on the CBC.

7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent FanSubrack

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the

service subracks.

Appearance

Figure 7-23 shows the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-23 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack 

 

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack has a DB9 connector at one end

and a DB15 connector at the other end.

Table 7-17 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Table 7-17 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack 

Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.7 Tx+ Twisted pair  

X1.2 X2.6 Tx-

X1.3 X2.3 Rx+ Twisted pair  

X1.4 X2.2 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 GND -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL is

connected to

X2.SHELL through

the shielding layer.

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-27

Page 184: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 184/214

Table 7-18 describes the signals listed in Table 7-17.

Table 7-18 Signals

Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

 

Installation

The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack 

is connected to the MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack. The DB9 connector at

the other end of the cable is connected to the Monitor port on the bottom subrack.

NOTE

When a cabinet is configured with multiple subracks, you should configure the subracks from bottom to

top. Therefore, the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is always connected to the

 bottom subrack in the cabinet.

7.14 Alarm Box Signal CableThe alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You

can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the

alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.

Appearance

The connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The actual type

must be consistent with that in the Site Survey Report. The following takes an alarm box signal

cable with the DB9 connector as an example.

Figure 7-24 shows an alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-24 Alarm box signal cable

 

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 185: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 185/214

Pin Assignment

Table 7-19 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable.

Table 7-19 Pins of the alarm box signal cable

RJ45 DB9

3 5

5 2

6 3

 

InstallationThe RJ45 connector at one end of the alarm box signal cable is connected to the input serial port

on the alarm box. The DB9/DB25 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the

serial port on the LMT.

Figure 7-25 shows the connection of the alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-25 Connection of the alarm box signal cable

 

7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power DistributionBox

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from

the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.

Appearance

Figure 7-26 shows the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-29

Page 186: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 186/214

Figure 7-26 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

 

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box has a DB9 connector at one end and

a DB15 connector at the other end.

Table 7-20 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Table 7-20 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.3 Tx+ Twisted pair  

X1.2 X2.2 Tx-

X1.3 X2.7 Rx+ Twisted pair  

X1.4 X2.6 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 RTN -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL isconnected to

X2.SHELL through

the shielding layer.

 

Table 7-21 describes the signals listed in Table 7-20.

Table 7-21 Signals

Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

 

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 187: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 187/214

Installation

The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box is

connected to the corresponding port on the power distribution box. The DB9 connector at the

other end of the cable is connected to the MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-27 shows the installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power 

distribution box.

Figure 7-27 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

 

7.16 EMU RS485 Communication Cable

The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and

the EMU.

Appearance

Figure 7-28 shows the RS485 communication cable.

Figure 7-28 RS485 communication cable

 

Pin Assignment

Table 7-22 describes the pins of the RS485 communication cable.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-31

Page 188: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 188/214

Table 7-22 Pins of the RS485 communication cable

RJ45 DB9

4 2

1 3

5 6

2 7

 

Installation

The DB9 male connector at one end of the RS485 communication cable is connected to the DB9

female connector on the environment monitoring device. The RJ45 connector at the other end

of the cable is connected to J1 port on the power distribution box.

NOTE

One environment monitoring device is delivered with one RS485 signal cable (10 m) and one RS232 signal

cable (2 m). Choose one signal cable based on the actual requirements. The RS485 signal cable is

recommended. Use the Ethernet cable as a substitute if the length of the delivered signal cable is not

sufficient.

7 Cables

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

7-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 189: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 189/214

8 LEDs on the Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

8.1 LEDs on the DPUc Board

There are thr ee LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.2 LEDs on the DPUd Board

There are thr ee LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board

There are thr ee LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.8.4 LEDs on the FG2a Board

Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

8.5 LEDs on the FG2c Board

Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, R UN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

8.6 LEDs on the GCUa Board

There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.8.7 LEDs on the GOUa Board

There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.8 LEDs on the GOUc Board

There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),

and ACT (optical port LED).

8.9 LEDs on the OIUa Board

There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

8.10 LEDs on the OMUa Board

There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HD, and OFFLINE.

8.11 LEDs on the PAMU Board

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

Page 190: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 190/214

There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

8.12 LEDs on the PEUa Board

There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.13 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

8.14 LEDs on the SCUa Board

Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

8.15 LEDs on the TNUa Board

There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.16 LEDs on the XPUa Board

Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT.

8.17 LEDs on the XPUb Board

Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

8 LEDs on the Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 191: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 191/214

8.1 LEDs on the DPUc Board

There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-1 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.

Table 8-1 LEDs on the DPUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the

 board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

8.2 LEDs on the DPUd Board

There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.

Table 8-2 LEDs on the DPUd board

LED Color Status DescriptionRUN Green ON for 1s and OFF

for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and

OFF for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the

 board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

Page 192: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 192/214

LED Color Status Description

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

8.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board

There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-3 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.

Table 8-3 LEDs on the EIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

8.4 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 8-4 LEDs on the FG2a board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

8 LEDs on the Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 193: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 193/214

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

8.5 LEDs on the FG2c Board

Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Table 8-5 LEDs on the FG2c board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

Page 194: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 194/214

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Orange OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

8.6 LEDs on the GCUa Board

There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the GCUa board.

Table 8-6 LEDs on the GCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the

 board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

8 LEDs on the Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 195: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 195/214

8.7 LEDs on the GOUa Board

There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

Table 8-7 LEDs on the GOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

 

8.8 LEDs on the GOUc Board

There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),

and ACT (optical port LED).

Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Table 8-8 LEDs on the GOUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-7

Page 196: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 196/214

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

LINK (optical

 port LED)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (optical

 port LED)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

8.9 LEDs on the OIUa Board

There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.

Table 8-9 LEDs on the OIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the

 board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive

signals properly.

8 LEDs on the Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

8-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 197: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 197/214

LED Color Status Description

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals

 properly.

 

8.10 LEDs on the OMUa Board

There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HD, and OFFLINE.

Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the OMUa board.

Table 8-10 LEDs on the OMUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the

 board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is being switched over to

the other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operation

on the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read or  

written.

 

8.11 LEDs on the PAMU Board

There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

Table 8-11 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-9

Page 198: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 198/214

Table 8-11 LEDs on the PAMU board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The PAMU board is functional and

communicates with the SCUa board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF

for 0.25s

The PAMU board is faulty or it does not

communicate with the SCUa board

 properly.

OFF The power supply to the PAMU board

is abnormal or the power distribution

 box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the PAMU

 board, however, the ALM LED is also

ON. This indicates that the ALM LED

is functional.

 

8.12 LEDs on the PEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-12 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 8-12 LEDs on the PEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

 

8 LEDs on the Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

8-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 199: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 199/214

8.13 LEDs on the POUc Board

There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 8-13 LEDs on the POUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals

 properly.

 

8.14 LEDs on the SCUa Board

Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

Table 8-14 LEDs on the SCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-11

Page 200: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 200/214

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

8.15 LEDs on the TNUa Board

There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-15 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.

Table 8-15 LEDs on the TNUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply,

 but the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power  

supply, or the board is

faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

8 LEDs on the Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

8-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 201: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 201/214

LED Color Status Description

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

 

8.16 LEDs on the XPUa Board

Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-16 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.

Table 8-16 LEDs on the XPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Green OFF There is no data transmission over  

the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the

Ethernet port.

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-13

Page 202: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 202/214

8.17 LEDs on the XPUb Board

Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.

Table 8-17 LEDs on the XPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Orange OFF There is no data transmission over  

the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the

Ethernet port.

 

8 LEDs on the Boards

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

8-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 203: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 203/214

9 DIP Switches on Components

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack 

The DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board

The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.

9.3 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board

The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

9.4 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board

The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

9.5 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board

The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP

switch is used to set the address of the PFCU boar d. When the PFCU board is configured in a

fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board

is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

9.6 Pins on the PFCB Board

The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,

these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-1

Page 204: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 204/214

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack

The DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch

The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the

DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack .

Appearance

Figure 9-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack 

 

Description about the DIP Switch

The DIP switch on the su brack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The

higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 9-1 describes the bits.

9 DIP Switches on Components

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 205: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 205/214

Table 9-1 Description about the bits

Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the

least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bitis set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significant

 bit)

Reserved

 

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd

number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:

1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.

2. Set bit 7 to ON.

3. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. Note that the setting of bit 8

remains unchanged.

l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.

l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 2 and that bit 8 is set to OFF. Table 9-2

describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of the DIPSwitch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

 

9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board

The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-3

Page 206: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 206/214

Figure 9-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In this

case, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.

l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.

In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.

l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced to

and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Table 9-3 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

9 DIP Switches on Components

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 207: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 207/214

Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted Pair

Cable

S1 8 Impedance

selection switch

of E1s/T1s 0-7

ON OFF

7 Impedance

selection switch

of E1s/T1s 8-15

ON OFF

6 Impedance

selection switch

of E1s/T1s

16-23

ON OFF

5 Impedance

selection switch

of E1s/T1s

24-31

ON OFF

1-4 Reserved

S3 1-8 TX ground

switch of E1s/

T1s 0-7

ON OFF

S4 1-8 TX ground

switch of E1s/

T1s 8-15

ON OFF

S5 1-8 TX ground

switch of E1s/

T1s 16-23

ON OFF

S6 1-8 TX ground

switch of E1s/

T1s 24-31

ON OFF

 

Table 9-4 describes the different DIP switches.

Table 9-4 Description of the different DIP switches

DIP Switch Description

E1/T1 impedance selection switch Used to select the logical transmission mode of the

 board and to notify the software of the current

transmission mode

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-5

Page 208: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 208/214

DIP Switch Description

E1/T1 TX ground switch Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end

of the E1/T1 signals

 

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switches

on the standby board.

l The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.

9.3 DIP Switch on the PAMU BoardThe PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 9-3 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

Figure 9-3 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

 

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.

To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table

9-5.

Table 9-5 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

9 DIP Switches on Components

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

9-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 209: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 209/214

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 9-5.

9.4 DIP Switches on the PEUa BoardThe PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Figure 9-4 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-7

Page 210: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 210/214

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom

 plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.

l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-4, there are two

square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-

 board, and thus you can set S10 along the side.The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-4 is to turn

inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or 

S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of 

S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.

l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between

the physical setting of S10 on the AEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by

command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET

E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,

E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for 

 balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must

also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced

mode.l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals

are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair 

cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding

of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1

 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-6 describes S2, S4, S6,

S8, and S10.

Table 9-6 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning 

S2 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

9 DIP Switches on Components

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

9-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 211: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 211/214

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning 

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting theworking mode,

consisting of two bits

(ON, ON) Setting theworking mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the

working mode to

E1 balanced

mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the

working mode to

T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the

working mode to

J1 mode

 

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are

set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

9.5 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board

The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP

switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a

fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board

is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)

Figure 9-5 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-9

Page 212: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 212/214

Figure 9-5 DIP switch on the PFCU board

 

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in

Table 9-7. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the

address of the PFCU board is 1.

Table 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch Description

SW1 1 (the least significant

 bit)

OFF 1

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)

Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board

 

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in

Table 9-8. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the

address of the PFCU board is 4.

9 DIP Switches on Components

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description

9-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2009-12-05)

Page 213: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 213/214

Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description

SW1 1 (the least significant bit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

9.6 Pins on the PFCB Board

The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,

these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these

 pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

Pins on the PFCB Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)

Figure 9-7 shows the pins on the PFCB board.

Figure 9-7 Pins on the PFCB board

 

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as describedin Table 9-9.

Table 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

PinNumber

1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16

Connec

ted to

 jumper

 No No No No Yes No No No

 

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 03 (2009-12-05) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-11

Page 214: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

8/3/2019 BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description-(V900R011C00_03)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-description-v900r011c0003 214/214

Pins on the PFCB Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)

Figure 9-8 shows the pins on the PFCB board.

Figure 9-8 Pins on the PFCB board

 

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described

in Table 9-10.

9 DIP Switches on Components

BSC6900 GSM

Hardware Description